JP2023011042A - Pinball game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of further enhancing playability.

SOLUTION: In a case of a big winning in a normal probability state and a normal ball entry state, depending on contents of a performance displayed during symbol variation related to the big winning, possibility that one of a first big winning symbol and a second big winning symbol is stop-displayed when the symbol variation related to the big winning is stopped is varied. When the cumulative number of times a symbol indicative of the big winning is stop-displayed reaches a predetermined number while probability variation continues after shifting from the normal probability state to a probability variation state and than a shift is made to the next normal probability state, a game state is shifted to the normal probability state after the end of a special game. Meanwhile, when the cumulative number of times the symbol indicative of the big winning is stop-displayed while the probability variation continues is less than a predetermined number, the game state can be shifted to the probability variation state after the end of the special game. When the symbol indicative of the big winning is stop-displayed after execution of the predetermined special performance, the game state is shifted to the probability variation state after the end of the special game.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a pinball game machine having a game area from which game balls are shot.

Conventionally, among various pinball game machines, a game machine called a so-called first-class pachinko game machine has a display area such as a liquid crystal display provided approximately in the center of the game board. display (hereinafter, such display is referred to as "symbol variation" or "variation display"). This game machine shifts to a special game called a jackpot in which more prize balls than in a normal game can be obtained when a combination of symbols becomes a specific mode when the variation of symbols in a plurality of rows is stopped. known as a thing. In the variable display of symbols in the display area, not only are multiple symbols variably displayed, but the variable display time is usually set in a state called a so-called reach screen, in which if one more symbol is aligned, a big hit will occur. The performance is intended to increase the player's sense of expectation, such as making it longer. In addition, the player's expectations are heightened by effects that use characters in images such as patterns to give a story to the variable display, and advance notice effects that suggest the high degree of expectation for transition to special games. (See Patent Document 1, for example).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-230714

Since a large number of gaming machines employing the above-described configuration already exist as conventional models, there is a demand for further improvement in game performance in order to differentiate them from conventional models.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of further improving game playability.

A pinball game machine according to one aspect of the present invention comprises a game board on which a game area is formed, a shooting device for shooting a game ball toward the game area in response to a player's shooting operation, and a second ball provided in the game area. 1 starting port, a second starting port provided in the game area and having an entry variation mechanism operable to change the entry state of the game ball from a relatively difficult state to an easy state, and a first starting port. Alternatively, a success/fail determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, based on the lottery value obtained when the ball enters the second start port, The symbols are variably displayed, and when the symbol display device that indicates the result of the win/loss judgment is displayed by the stop display of the symbols, and the symbol that indicates that the result of the win/fail judgment is a big hit is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device, a special display is made after the stop display. A special game control means for shifting to a game, and from a normal probability state in which the probability of the result of success/failure determination to be a big hit is a predetermined probability to a probability change state in which the probability of the result of success/failure determination to be a big win is higher than the predetermined probability. Probability state control means for shifting from a normal ball-entering state in which the ease of entering a ball into the second starting port is relatively low to an easy-to-enter state in which the ease of entering a ball into the second starting port is relatively high. A ball entry state control means and an effect display device capable of displaying an effect are provided. There are at least a first big win pattern and a second big win pattern as kinds of patterns indicating that the result of winning/failure determination is a big win, and the execution is performed after the stop display of the first big win pattern in a normal probability state and a normal ball entering state. While it is possible to shift to the easy ball entry state after the end of the special game, it is not shifted to the easy ball entry state after the end of the special game executed after the stop display of the second big win pattern in the normal probability state and normal ball entry state. , When the result of the win/fail judgment is a big hit in the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state, the pattern change related to the big win is changed according to the contents of the effect displayed on the effect display device during the symbol change related to the big win. Possibilities of which one of the first big winning symbol and the second big winning symbol will be stop-displayed at the time of stopping are different. When the cumulative number of stop-displayed symbols indicating a big hit reaches a predetermined number during the continuation of the variable probability state from the transition from the normal probability state to the variable probability state until the next transition to the normal probability state, the stop. While transitioning to the normal probability state after the end of the special game executed after the display, if the cumulative number of stop-displayed symbols indicating a big hit during the continuation of the variable probability is less than a predetermined number, execute after the stop display. After the end of the special game to be executed, it is possible to shift to the probability change state, and when the symbol indicating the big win is stopped after the execution of the predetermined special performance, the probability change after the end of the special game executed after the stop display. state.

In addition, any combination of the above constituent elements, and those in which the constituent elements and expressions of the present invention are replaced with each other between methods, devices, systems, computer programs, recording media storing computer programs, data structures, etc. , is effective as an aspect of the present invention.

According to the pinball game machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of realizing further improvement in game performance.

It is a diagram showing the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko game machine. It is a diagram showing the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko game machine. It is a diagram showing a functional block of the pachinko game machine. 3 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of a main substrate; FIG. It is a figure which shows typically a right/wrong determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing range setting of winning/failing lottery values for each set value; It is a figure which shows a pattern determination table typically. It is a figure which shows a fluctuation pattern table typically. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing a prior validity determination table referred to in prior validity determination; It is a figure which shows typically the preliminary right/wrong determination table corresponding to game setting. 4 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a sub-board; FIG. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is a figure which shows typically the outline of a mobile cooperation system. 3 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of a main board and sub-boards; FIG. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the hardware constitutions of a production|presentation control apparatus. It is a flow chart showing the control start processing of the main board in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting change process of S124 in FIG. 15; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting confirmation process of S126 in FIG. 15; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the main process of S120 in FIG. 15; FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing details of interrupt processing; It is a flow chart showing the control start processing of the sub-board in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing in detail the main process of S518 in FIG. 20; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a command is received from the main board; It is a flow chart showing an interrupt process when a timer interrupt for effect display control occurs. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a sub CPU receives a command from a control CPU; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing interrupt processing when a timer interrupt for controlling various devices occurs. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a special design variation display. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a decorative design variation display. It is a flow chart showing the process of the special game. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a small-hit game. It is a diagram showing in detail the transition of the game state at the time of the fall determination. It is a diagram showing the transition of the game state after the transition to the probability fluctuation state and easy-enter state. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect|presentation display of an easy-ball-entering state. It is a diagram showing in detail the transition of the game state at the end of the easy-ball entry state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display when the easy-to-ball-entering state ends with the start of symbol variation, which is the end of the easy-to-ball-entering state. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of effect display when the easy-ball-entering state ends with the end of the pattern variation, which is the end of the easy-ball-entering state. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of effect display in the case where the easy-ball-entering state continues even after the end of the symbol variation that can be the end of the easy-ball-entering state. It is a diagram showing in detail the transition of the game state when the fall determination is made after the number of symbol variations exceeds a predetermined number. It is a diagram showing in detail the transition of the game state when the hit/fail determination is a big hit after the number of symbol variations exceeds a predetermined number. It is a diagram showing an effect display example in the case that the hit or failure determination is a big hit after the number of times of symbol variation exceeds a predetermined number. It is a figure which shows the structure of the front side of the pachinko game machine based on a present Example. It is a figure which shows the example of a prize-winning display which can be performed during a special game. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of changes in the display of the total number of acquisitions; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect display example displaying that the total number of winning balls has reached a predetermined number; It is a diagram showing a display example of the display of the total winning number during the normal game.

(Prerequisite technology)
In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, a plurality of games corresponding to the conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machine are mixed. The second game is preferentially executed so that the first game and the second game as the plurality of games are not executed at the same time. Moreover, in order to make these game characteristics compatible, it is equipped with a plurality of starting prize winning openings, a plurality of special symbol display devices, and a plurality of holding lamps. It is designed so that the number of jackpot balls released in the second game is generally larger than that in the first game. For example, the second game has a higher probability of becoming a big hit with variable probability, and the second game has a larger number of unit games that make up the special game when the second game hits (the opening time of the big winning port is A long long opening unit game and a short opening unit game having a short opening time are mixed in one special game, and even if the number of unit games is the same, the second game is longer than the first game. ), the second game is designed to be relatively more profitable than the first game. On top of that, at first, the first game is aimed at the first hit, and after the big hit in the first game is given to shorten the working time, the second game is repeatedly aimed at to obtain a lot of balls. Realize.

FIG. 1 shows the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko game machine. Pachinko machine 100
consists mainly of a game machine frame and a game board. The game machine frame of the pachinko game machine 100 includes an outer frame 101, a front frame 102, a transparent plate 103, a door 104, an upper ball tray 105, a lower ball tray 106, a launch handle 107, a speaker 108, a production button 109, a cross key 110, A decorative lamp 111 is included. The outer frame 101 has an opening and is a frame for fixing the pachinko game machine 100 to a position where it should be installed. The front frame 102 is a frame body aligned with the opening of the outer frame 101 and attached to the outer frame 101 by a hinge mechanism (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. The front frame 102 includes a mechanism for shooting game balls, a mechanism for detachably housing a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting game balls, and the like.

The transparent plate 103 is made of glass or the like and supported by the door 104 . The door 104 is attached to the front frame 102 by a hinge mechanism (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. The upper ball tray 105 has a mechanism for storing game balls, delivering game balls to the launch rail, extracting game balls to the lower ball tray 106, and the like. The lower ball tray 106 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Speakers 108 are provided on the left and right sides of the upper part of the door 104, and sound effects and music sounds are output according to the game state and the performance by means of controlling the performance. Most of the resin member forming the exterior of the door 104 is translucent, and the decorative lamp 111 is provided inside the translucent interior. The decorative lamp 111 is an LED that emits light in various colors according to the game state, the effect, etc. by a means for controlling the effect, and plays a role of the effect by blinking or the like.

The game board 80 has a first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, a big winning port 20, a first operating port 31, a second operating port 32, and a general winning port 33 on a game area 81 partitioned by rails 82. , an outlet 34, a performance display device 60, and a center decoration 64. The center decoration 64 is a decorative resin member provided so as to form a screen frame of the effect display device 60 over the substantially central part of the game area 81 and its upper and right parts. 60 protection, decoration and other functions. A stage 65 is formed at the bottom of the center decoration 64 on which the game ball that has flowed in rolls. It is distributed to the side direction that does not enter the ball. Above the center decoration 64, a movable accessory 66 is provided which is driven along with the content of the performance to perform a performance action. In the game area 81, mechanisms such as a plurality of game nails and windmills (not shown) for forming a flow path for game balls are installed. In this specification, "entering the ball", "winning", and "falling" may be synonymous with each other. In addition, each winning hole and each ball entrance may be configured as a "passing hole" (also called a "gate" or "through chucker") through which game balls pass. ', 'winning', 'falling in' and 'passing' may also be synonymous with each other.

The first starting port 11 is provided as a starting winning port corresponding to the first game, and the second starting port 12 is provided as a starting winning port corresponding to the second game. The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 are configured so that it is possible to aim for entry into one of the game balls according to the player's intention. The first starting port 11 is provided substantially at the lower center of the game area 81 , and the second starting port 12 is provided directly below the first starting port 11 . Left-handed, that is, when the ball is hit relatively weakly aiming to flow into the left passage of the center decoration 64, it is possible or easy to enter the first start hole 11 and the second start hole 12, while right-handed. That is, if the ball is hit relatively strongly aiming to flow into the right passage of the center decoration 64, it is possible or easy to enter the second starting hole 12, but it is impossible to enter the first starting hole 11. Alternatively, a flow path is formed by arranging the game nails so as to make it difficult to enter the ball. However, since the upper part of the opening of the second starting port 12 is usually covered with the first starting port 11 and the inflow of the game ball is hindered, unless the expansion mechanism of the second starting port 12 is opened, the second starting port 12 is impossible or difficult to enter. The winning lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and is executed each time a ball enters the first start port 11 or the second start port 12. be.

In addition, the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 may be provided at positions separated from each other to such an extent that it is possible to target one of them depending on the launch strength of the game ball. The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 may be installed separately on the left side and the right side of the game area 81, respectively, so that a game ball aimed at one side is difficult to enter the other side. For example, the first starting hole 11 is provided at a position where it is possible or easy to enter the ball when the ball is hit left-handed, that is, when the ball is shot relatively weakly so as to flow into the left passage of the center decoration 64 . The second starting port 12 is provided at a position where it is possible or easy to enter the ball when hitting the ball to the right, that is, when the ball is shot relatively strongly so as to flow into the right passage of the center decoration 64 .

The first starting port 11 is provided with a first starting winning detection device 16 . The first start winning detection device 16 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first start opening 11, and generates first start winning information indicating the entry of the ball at the time of entry. The second starting port 12 includes a second starting prize detection device 17, a normal electric accessory 90 (so-called electric tulip) that is an expansion mechanism, and a normal electric accessory solenoid 91 for opening and closing the normal electric accessory 90. Prepare. The second start winning detection device 17 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second start opening 12, and generates second start winning information indicating the entry of the ball at the time of entry.

The first operation opening 31 is provided at a left side position of the game area 81 and includes a first passage detection device 36 . The first passage detection device 36 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the first operation opening 31, and generates passage information indicating the passage when it passes. The second operation opening 32 is provided at the right side position of the game area 81 and includes a second passage detection device 37 . The second passage detection device 37 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the second operation opening 32, and generates passage information indicating the passage at the time of passage. Passage of the game ball to the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 triggers an opening lottery for determining whether or not to spread the normal electric accessory 90 . When the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal symbol, which is the symbol indicating the determination result of the open lottery, is variably displayed on the normal symbol display portion 45. - 特許庁Therefore, the open lottery is also called "normal symbol lottery". After a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the fluctuation display of normal symbols stops. When the normal symbol stops at a winning symbol, the normal electric accessory 90 is expanded by the driving force of the normal electric accessory solenoid 91, and the possibility of the ball entering the second starting port 12 increases. As a modified example, the number of operating ports may be set to one, and the configuration may be such that one is provided at the left side position of the game area 81 .

The three general winning openings 33 are each equipped with a general winning detection device 38 for detecting the entry of game balls. The general winning detection device 38 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 33, and generates general winning information indicating the entry of the game ball at the time of entry.

The large winning opening 20 includes a large winning opening detection device 25 for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a large winning opening solenoid 92 for opening and closing the large winning opening 20 . The big winning detection device 25 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the big winning hole 20, and generates big winning hole winning information indicating the ball entering when the ball enters. The big winning opening 20 is a horizontally rectangular winning opening that opens as a "jackpot" when the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 stops in a predetermined manner. The big winning opening 20 is provided at the upper right position of the out opening 34 . In addition, as a modified example, one more large winning opening may be provided in the central lower portion of the game area 81 or above or below the large winning opening 20, and a plurality of large winning openings may be provided. The out port 34 is a discharge port from which game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports are discharged, and includes an out detection device 39 . The out detection device 39 is a sensor that detects a game ball discharged through the out port 34, and generates discharge information indicating the detection at the time of detection. The out port 34 is provided at the central lowermost end of the game area 81 so that all game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports can be guided and passed through. A plurality of out detection devices 39 may be arranged side by side while ensuring a game ball passage with a sufficient width to prevent the out port 34 from being clogged with balls.

A pattern display unit 120 is arranged outside and below the game area 81 on the game board 80 . The symbol display unit 120 includes a first special symbol display portion 41, a second special symbol display portion 42, a first special symbol reservation display portion 71, a second special symbol reservation display portion 72, a normal symbol display portion 45, and a normal symbol display portion. Display units such as a holding display unit 75, a game state display unit 76, an abnormality notification unit 77, and the like are provided. Specifically, a first special symbol display portion 41 corresponding to the first game and a second special symbol display portion 42 corresponding to the second game are arranged side by side on the lower left side to form the first special symbol. Variations of 51 and second special symbol 52 are displayed.

The first special symbol 51 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the first lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 11, and when stopped in a predetermined hit mode, the special game. As a big hit occurs. The second special symbol 52 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the second success or failure lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 12, and when stopped in a predetermined hit mode, the special game. As a big hit occurs. The first special symbol display portion 41 and the second special symbol display portion 42 are, for example, an 8-segment LED consisting of 8 segments, 7 segments forming a "figure 8" and 1 segment representing a "dot". is a display device. An 8-segment LED can express a numerical value of 8 bits by combining 8 segments. The first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52 represented by a combination of segments do not necessarily form letters or numbers, and may be generally meaningless symbols formed by combinations of segments. . These symbols are replaced one after another at high speed and displayed on the first special symbol display portion 41 and the second special symbol display portion 42, or predetermined display (eg "-") and non-display (eg all lights off) are switched. By displaying the symbol corresponding to the determination result after repeating for a predetermined time, the symbol variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is realized. It should be noted that the first special symbol display portion 41 and the second special symbol display portion 42 use an LED dot array that is not an 8-segment LED, and a plurality of kinds of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol display portion 42 are combined with the lighting pattern and the lighting color. A special pattern 52 may be expressed.

In addition, since the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 do not necessarily have a role of production, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol display portion 41 and the second special symbol on the lower left side of the game area 81 are displayed. It is displayed in an inconspicuous size on the display part 42.例文帳に追加However, when adopting a method of expressing without using a decorative pattern by giving the special pattern itself a dramatic role, the special pattern is displayed on another display device such as a liquid crystal display instead of the 8-segment LED. It may be configured to allow

Above the first special symbol display part 41, a first special symbol reservation display part 71 is provided as a suspension lamp for special symbol variation corresponding to the first game, and above the second special symbol display part 42, a second special symbol display part 71 is provided. A second special symbol reservation display portion 72 is provided as a special symbol variation reservation lamp corresponding to the game of . The first special figure reservation display unit 71 consists of two lamps, and the number of pending lottery values in the first game depending on the number of lights or blinking numbers (hereinafter, the number of pending lottery values) (also simply referred to as "holding number"). The number of reservations in the first special symbol reservation display unit 71 is the number of times (the number) of obtaining the lottery value based on winning the first start port 11 during the variation of the first special symbol 51 or during the execution of the special game. Yes, indicating the number of winning balls for which symbol variation has not yet been executed. The second special figure reservation display unit 72 also consists of two lamps, and displays the number of reservations in the second game according to the number of lights or the number of blinks. The number of reservations in the second special symbol reservation display unit 72 is the number of times (the number) of obtaining the lottery value based on winning the second start port 12 during the variation of the second special symbol 52 or during the execution of the special game. Yes, indicating the number of winning balls for which symbol variation has not yet been executed. The pending number of win/fail lottery values is also displayed at the bottom of the screen of the effect display device 60 in the form of the number of lit pending lamp images.

A normal symbol display portion 45 is provided on the right side of the symbol display unit 120 . For the sake of convenience, the normal symbol display unit 45 is composed of two lamps, and the normal symbol display state is represented by a lighting combination thereof. First, by flashing the first lamp and the second lamp at the same time, the variation of the normal pattern is expressed, and finally, the normal pattern is stopped by the combination of the lighting states of the first lamp and the second lamp. is expressed. For example, turning on the first lamp and turning off the second lamp expresses the stop pattern of losing, turning off the first lamp and turning on the second lamp expresses the first winning mode, and the first The lighting of both the lamp and the second lamp expresses the second winning mode.

In addition, on the right side of the normal symbol display portion 45, a normal pattern suspension display portion 75 is provided as a suspension lamp for normal symbol variation. The normal pattern reservation display unit 75 also consists of two lamps, and displays the number of normal pattern fluctuations reserved by the number of lights or the number of flashes. The number of pending normal symbol fluctuations is the number of game balls that have passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 during normal symbol fluctuations, and the number of normal symbol lotteries in which normal symbol fluctuations have not yet been executed. indicates

The symbol display unit 120 is provided with a game state display section 76 and an abnormality notification section 77 . The game state display unit 76 is a display unit that displays a game state such as a specific game state, which will be described later, and is composed of, for example, one lamp and one 7-segment LED. For example, each game state is notified by lighting a lamp when the probability is fluctuating, blinking when the ball is easy to enter, and extinguishing when the normal state. to display the number of unit games (number of rounds) to be executed in the special game. The abnormality notification unit 77 is a display unit that notifies an abnormality of a part of the game machine, and is composed of, for example, a plurality of lamps, and notifies the abnormality with a lighting pattern corresponding to the type of abnormality. It should be noted that these display units may be configured individually without being collectively arranged in the pattern display unit 120, or they may be divided into a plurality of display devices grouped as appropriate. Further, the notification of the game state such as the specific game state may be configured so as to be limited to a predetermined period of time, for example, a certain period of time after the power is restored.

Approximately in the center of the game area 81, an effect display device 60 is provided so that the screen is exposed from the screen frame formed by the center decoration 64, and the decorative pattern 61 interlocking with the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52 is displayed. Display the variation of the effect image including. Such display is hereinafter referred to as "symbol variation" or "variation display".

The effect display device 60 is a display device composed of a liquid crystal display that variably displays the decorative pattern 61 in conjunction with the variable display of the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52 . The decorative pattern 61 is a pattern for visually directing the determination result display of the lottery indicated by the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52 . The effect display device 60 displays, as the decorative pattern 61, a moving image in which a plurality of rows of patterns imitating a slot machine game, for example, are varied in the central area of the screen. In this embodiment, symbols composed of numerals "0" to "9" are displayed in three rows and varied, and finally the combinations of the three symbols that are stopped and displayed indicate hits or misses. Each of the plurality of patterns constituting the decorative pattern 61 is composed of numbers, letters, or symbols decorated with colors and patterns. It may be configured in such a manner that a different pattern is added to each and integrated. The pattern is a pattern depicting a motif related to the decoration or performance theme set for the model of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and may be a pattern depicting a person or animal character, for example. The decorative pattern 61 is switched between a case where a pattern integrally included in the pattern is variably displayed and a case where the pattern is separated and only numbers, letters and symbols are variably displayed according to the development of the performance. The configuration may be such that In the background of the variable display of the decorative pattern 61, a moving image having a performance effect related to the decoration or performance theme set for the model of the pachinko game machine 100 is displayed in conjunction with the pattern variation.

The effect display device 60 is composed of a liquid crystal display, which is a high-definition dot-matrix display device. There may be. In the case of a large size, the game ball passage on the right side of the performance display device is formed with a passage width that allows one game ball to pass through, and if the player hits the game ball with the maximum strength as a so-called "right-handed hit", the right side passage is almost certain. A game ball can be passed through, and it is possible to distinguish between so-called "left-handed". The effect display device 60 may be configured not only by a single display device but also by a combination of a plurality of display devices. In the case of multiple displays, displays of different sizes, such as a combination of a main liquid crystal and a sub-liquid crystal, may be combined. (upper ball plate, right decorative lamp, etc.). If installed near the firing handle, it may be configured in the form of a touch panel that allows the player to input operations. The effect display device 60 is not limited to a liquid crystal display, and may be configured by a display device such as an organic EL display, or may be configured by mechanical display means such as a drum rotation type, or display means such as an LED matrix type. .

The effect button 109 is an operation input means that the player presses to input a predetermined instruction to the gaming machine according to the content of the effect. A performance button 109 is provided on the front frame 102 . The production button 109 is normally stored in the front frame 102, but a rod-shaped member is attached to the back side of the production button 109, and the rod-shaped member and the production button 109 are arranged in a direction substantially perpendicular to the board surface. It is provided so that it can be protruded. The rod-shaped member and the performance button 109 function as a lever 112 in a state of being projected outside, and the player can grip the performance button 109 and pull the lever 112 downward. This also allows the player to input a predetermined instruction to the gaming machine. The cross key 110 is operation input means for the player to input a direction instruction to the gaming machine, and is provided on the left outer wall surface of the upper ball tray 105 .

The game method and control flow performed in the gaming machine having the above configuration will be outlined. When the player rotates the shooting handle 107 by hand, the game balls stored in the upper ball tray 105 are guided by the rail 82 one by one and shot to the game area 81 with the intensity corresponding to the rotation angle. . When the player manually fixes the rotating position of the shooting handle 107, the shooting of game balls is repeated at regular time intervals. The game ball shot to the upper part of the game area 81 hits a plurality of game nails, a windmill, a center ornament 64, etc., and falls in a direction according to how it hits. When the game ball falls into each of the winning openings of the general winning opening 33, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, and the big winning opening 20, the prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning opening enter the upper ball tray 105 or the lower ball tray. It is dispensed onto the ball tray 106 . A game ball falling into each winning hole such as a general winning hole 33 is treated as a safe ball, and a game ball falling into an out hole 34 is treated as an out ball. The ejection of safe balls may be excluded from detection by the out detection device 39, or the specification may be such that the safe balls are guided to the area where the out detection device 39 is provided and all of the ejections are detected by the out detection device 39. may be Alternatively, guidance of safe balls and detection of safe balls by the out detection device 39 may not be performed, and the number of discharged balls may be determined by adding the number of detected safe balls to the number of detected out balls.

Further, when the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal symbol is variably displayed in the normal symbol display part 45, and is stop-displayed after the lapse of the variability display time determined prior to the display. When the normal symbols are stop-displayed in the first winning mode or the second winning mode, the normal electric accessories 90 are expanded based on the winning mode of the stopped-displayed symbols and the game state when they are stopped. . That is, when the game state when the symbols are stopped is the normal game state and the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in the first winning mode, the normal electric accessory 90 is opened for a short period of 0.1 seconds. Further, when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in the first winning mode during the specific game state (for example, the easy-to-enter state), the normal symbols are displayed in the second winning mode during the normal time and the specific game state (for example, the easy-to-enter state). When the stop display is performed, a long opening of 6 seconds is executed as the opening of the normal electric accessory 90 . Here, the winning probability of normal symbols and the execution probability of long opening are set differently depending on the game state. Specifically, in the open lottery in the normal state, the normal pattern wins with a probability of 1/100, and the execution probability of the short opening in that case (the probability that the winning pattern of the first winning mode is selected) is 1/100. 3. The execution probability of long opening (the probability of selecting the winning pattern of the second winning mode) is set to 2/3. In addition, in the open lottery in the specific game state (for example, easy ball entry state), the normal symbol wins with a probability of 99/100, and the selection probability between the first win mode and the second win mode is the same as in the normal game state. However, it is set so that the long opening is executed even if the lottery is won in any mode. In this way, in the easy-to-enter state, the function of changing the hit probability of the normal pattern (probability change from 1/100 to 99/100) and the function of extending the opening time (0 when the opening time is displayed stopped in the first winning mode) 0.1 second to 6.0 seconds), the ease of entering the second starting port 12 is enhanced. In addition, the function (long opening) to extend the operating period of the normal electric accessory 90 may be called "open extension".

In addition, as described above, the probability of long opening in the normal state is higher than the probability of short opening, so that the long opening is executed at a certain rate even in the normal state when winning the normal pattern. . As a modification, on the contrary, in the normal state, the probability of short opening may be higher than the probability of long opening. good. Further, in the ball-entering easy state, it is possible to increase the ease of ball-entering the second starting port 12 by using three functions including a function of shortening the variation time of normal symbols. In that case, the normal pattern variation time is, for example, 10 seconds in the normal state and 2 seconds in the easy-to-enter state. It should be noted that the winning probability of the open lottery in the normal state may be set to zero (0/100), and the specification may be such that the normal electric accessory 90 can be expanded only when the open lottery is performed in the easy-to-enter state. Further, when the normal electric accessories 90 are expanded, it may be notified in advance to that effect, or may be notified before the start of the normal pattern variation by reading in advance the suspension of the normal symbol variation, or the normal symbol variation may be notified. Notification may be made during the change.

As a modification of the opening mode when the normal electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 is opened for a long time, the total opening time is extended to about 6 seconds by repeating the 2-second opening, which is longer than the short opening, three times. It is good also as an aspect. Alternatively, a plurality of combinations of the open time and the number of times of opening may be prepared, and one of them may be selected. For example, in the case of three 2-second openings, the total opening time is the same as in the case of one 6-second opening, but the former is longer than the latter when the interval period is included. Therefore, especially in the configuration of the modification in which the second starting port 12 is arranged in the right-handed direction, the former is the one who enters the ball assuming that the player who notices the opening matches the hitting direction with the second starting port 12 from that point. The chances are long. In addition, it is possible to configure such that there are a plurality of winning types of normal symbols, and the opening mode of the expansion mechanism differs according to the winning types. For example, when the normal pattern is the first hit, the normal state is 0.1 seconds open once, and the easy ball entry state is 1 second open three times, and when the second hit is the normal state. In this case, the ball may be opened once for 6 seconds, and in the easy-to-ball state, the open for 2 seconds may be opened twice.

On the other hand, when the ball is entered into the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in the first special symbol display section 41, the second special symbol display section 42 and the effect display device 60. , and the decorative pattern 61 are variably displayed. The variable display of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is stopped after the lapse of the variable display time determined prior to display. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are variably displayed according to a variation pattern in which the variation mode from the start to stop of variation is determined. The decorative pattern 61 is variably displayed according to a variability performance pattern in which a variability mode from the start to stop of the variability is determined. Plural kinds of variation patterns and variation performance patterns are prepared respectively, and each of them has various lengths of variation time. While the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are variably displayed according to the variation pattern, the decorative design 61 is variably displayed according to the variation performance pattern having the same variation time. In the fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation display time is set for each pattern as a condition for ending the pattern fluctuation, and when the fluctuation display time elapses, the first special pattern 51, the second special pattern 52, and the decorative pattern 61 change. be stopped. Hereinafter, the variable display of the decorative pattern 61 displayed according to the variable effect pattern will be exemplified, and the variable effect pattern will be briefly described. In addition, details such as a method of determining the variation pattern and the variation effect pattern will be described separately.

As an example of the variable display of the decorative pattern 61, first, the symbols in all three rows are changed like the rotation of the reels of a slot machine at the start of the variation, and when the variation end timing is approached, the symbols are stopped row by row, thereby finally stopping. Display the symbol combination as. Incidentally, as an operation when the variation of the decorative symbols 190 is stopped, it is possible to control not to stop one row at a time but to stop a plurality of rows at the same time so as to attract the attention of the performance display other than the decorative symbols during the variable display, or in a shorter variation time. You may enable it to display a design variation. In addition, as an operation at the start of the variation of the decorative pattern 190, control is performed so as to delay the start of variation of a part of the rows according to the subsequent development of the variation (type of production pattern, etc.), so as to produce a sense of expectation. can be

Next, the variation effect pattern will be briefly described. The variable performance pattern includes a normal out of reach performance pattern, a reach out performance pattern, and a reach big hit performance pattern. The normal outlier effect pattern is a effect pattern when displaying a normal outlier pattern combination. The out-of-reach performance pattern is a performance pattern when a combination of out-of-reach symbols is displayed through a ready-to-win state in which a big win is achieved if one more symbol is aligned. The ready-to-win big-hit production pattern is a production pattern when a big-hit symbol combination is displayed through the ready-to-win state. In particular, the reach state pattern includes patterns with various long and short fluctuation times. A reach pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time is called "normal reach", and a reach pattern with a long fluctuation time is called "super reach". ”. The usual out-of-ordinary performance pattern, the out-of-reach performance pattern, and the ready-to-win big hit performance pattern each include a normal pattern displayed in a normal state and a time-saving pattern displayed in a time-saving state. However, even in the normal state, if the second pattern variation corresponds to the ball entering the second starting port 12, the probability that the big hit will change and the number of unit games of the special game will increase. Since it can be said that the chance state is higher than the first variation corresponding to the ball entering the first starting hole 11, a pattern for chance presentation may be used to indicate that there is a chance for a relatively advantageous big win to occur. In addition, although the pattern for time saving is used in a time saving state in an Example, since it accompanies time saving in a probability variable state, the time saving pattern is used also in a probability variable state. However, in the modified example, it may be a specification that uses a pattern for probability variation that is different from that for time saving in the probability variation state. Alternatively, it may be a specification that uses a common pattern for time saving and probability variation, or a specification that uses a pattern for probability variation in a probability variation state without using a pattern for time saving.

When the number of winning lotteries held reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3), the symbol variation time in the case of losing is shortened (hereinafter also referred to as "shortened variation") in order to improve the game efficiency. Similarly, when the number of pending lotteries is 4, the pattern variation time in the case of losing is further shortened than the case of the above 3 in order to further improve the game efficiency (hereinafter also referred to as "super shortened variation"). ). When the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 at the time of stopping become a stop mode indicating a big win after the above-described symbol fluctuation, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. The game shifts to a special game, and the opening/closing operation of the big winning opening 20 is started. The mode of stopping the decorative symbols 61 indicating a big hit is, for example, a mode of combination in which the types of three symbols match.

There are two types of special games, a normal special game and a shortened special game, and there is a big difference in the profit from winning prize balls. A normal special game is started by displaying an effect screen called start demo time. After the start demonstration time is displayed on the screen, the big winning hole 20 is opened, and after the opening continues for about 30 seconds, or after 9 or more game balls fall, it is temporarily closed. The operation from opening to closing of such a large prize winning opening 20 is basically called a unit game, but there may be cases where multiple short-time openings are repeated during one unit game. After the opening and closing of the big winning opening 20 or the unit game is repeated a predetermined number of times, for example, 4 times or 16 times, the normal special game is ended by displaying a performance screen called end demo time. In normal special games, 9 or more balls can be sufficiently expected to be entered per unit game, and sufficient prize balls (also referred to as ``discharged balls'') can be obtained by 16 unit games, resulting in a large profit. is obtained. A special game in which the unit game is repeated 16 times is also called "16R big win", and a special game in which the unit game is repeated 4 times is called "4R big win". Although the unit game is repeated 16 times, the unit game is substantially repeated a small number of times by opening the big winning opening 20 for a shorter time (for example, 1.6 seconds) in some unit games. It is also possible to realize a normal special game (sometimes referred to as "substantial nR jackpot") similar to the one.

On the other hand, in the shortened special game, the start demonstration time and the end demonstration time are short or almost short (eg, 0.1 seconds), and the big winning opening 20 is opened for only 1.6 seconds in one unit game. This unit game is repeated twice and the shortened special game is ended. In the shortened special game, since the opening of the big winning hole 20 is repeated only twice for a very short period of time, almost no ball can enter the big winning hole 20, and the number of balls that come out is substantially equal to zero in the special game. be. A special game in which two unit games are repeated is also called a "2R jackpot" as appropriate. Although the number of unit games is the same as that of the normal special game, a shortened special game can be realized by opening the big winning opening 20 for a shorter time than usual in all unit games.

Further, through the above-described pattern variation, when the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52 and the decorative pattern 61 at the time of stop are in a predetermined small winning mode, a small winning game composed of one unit game , and the opening/closing operation of the big winning opening 20 is executed. In one unit game that constitutes the small winning game, the big winning opening 20 is opened for only about 1.6 seconds, and the appearance is similar to that of the 2R big winning.

When a special game occurs and the hit stop pattern at that time is in a specific mode (for example, "777"), a probability variation, which is one of the specific games, is further started after the special game is finished. During the probability variation, a lottery with a higher probability of winning than the normal probability state is performed, and a new special game can occur relatively early. It should be noted that the fact that the determination result of the win/fail lottery is a specific jackpot, that is, a jackpot with a probability change may not be clearly indicated on the outside, and may be in a latent probability change state in which it is not explicitly reported as a decorative pattern or performance content. In that case, the effect display device 60 does not clearly indicate whether the probability is variable or non-variable even during the variable probability. It should be noted that, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect display device 60 may indicate whether it is a probability variation or a non-probability variation.

An easy ball entry state, which is one of the specific game states, is started in the normal game after the special game ends. In the ball-entering easy state, the winning probability of the open lottery is increased more than usual, and the opening extension is executed to extend the opening time of the normal electric accessory 90. - 特許庁Since the number of hits of normal symbols per fixed period of time can be increased and the ease with which a ball enters the second starting port 12 also increases, there is a high possibility that the number of balls entering the second starting port 12 will also increase. Therefore, as a result of increasing the chances of winning a prize ball by entering the second starting port 12, it is possible to continue playing while hardly reducing the number of balls in possession or gradually increasing the number of balls in possession.

In the easy-to-enter state, as one of the specific game states, so-called time saving is further executed in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is shortened compared to the normal state. The fluctuation time of the first special pattern 51, the second special pattern 52, and the decorative pattern 61 is returned to the original fluctuation time after the fluctuation display is performed a predetermined number of times, for example, 100 times, but the fluctuation number is reached. If a big hit occurs before, the time saving will end once. Since the fluctuation time of the first special pattern 51, the second special pattern 52, and the decorative pattern 61 is shortened in the reduction of working hours, compared with the case of the normal state in which the pattern is changed with the normal fluctuation time, it is possible to wait until the big hit occurs. time can be shortened, and the easiness of obtaining a big win can be relatively increased. In a modified example, it may be a specification that does not implement the time saving of the special symbol in the easy-to-enter state.

FIG. 2 shows the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko game machine. The power switch 150 is a switch for turning on/off the power of the pachinko game machine 100 . The main board 200 controls the overall operation of the pachinko game machine 100, and processes overall game operations such as a lottery when winning the first start port 11 and the second start port 12 in particular. The sub-board 300 includes a liquid crystal unit 151 and controls display contents in the effect display device 60 , and particularly changes the effect display contents according to the determination result by the main board 200 . The back set mechanism 152 includes a prize ball tank 153, a flow path for prize balls, a payout device 154 for paying out prize balls, and the like. The payout device 154 pays out the game balls supplied from the prize ball tank 153 to the upper ball tray 105 according to the winning to each prize winning opening. The payout control board 155 controls the payout operation by the payout device 154 . The shooting device 156 shoots the balls stored in the upper ball tray 105 to the game area 81 one by one. A firing control board 157 controls the firing operation of the launcher 156 . The power board 158 supplies power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 . A performance display section 159 is provided on the substrate of the main substrate 200 . The performance display unit 159 is composed of four 7-segment LEDs that display, for example, a four-digit number indicating the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of shot balls, which is the sum of safe balls and out balls.

A setting change device 170 is provided on the board of the main board 200 . The setting change device 170 is a device for changing settings to one of a plurality of settings (also referred to as game settings) corresponding to a plurality of game specifications. For example, six levels of settings (setting 1 to setting 6) are prepared as game settings, and the probability of winning a big hit can be varied according to the game settings. Specifically, the larger the numerical value among the settings 1 to 6, the more advantageous the game specifications can be for the player. The jackpot probability of each setting can be determined so that ≦M4≦M5≦M6. It is not essential to assign different jackpot probabilities to different game settings, and the jackpot probabilities may be the same between different game settings. For example, the same jackpot probability may be assigned to all game settings from setting 1 to setting 6.

The setting change device 170 includes a setting key cylinder 171 for inserting a setting key held by an employee of the game parlor, a setting change button 172 for changing the setting to one of a plurality of game settings, and a set value. It includes a setting display section 173 that lights up and a setting memory that stores set values. The setting key cylinder 171 is a turnkey switch for shifting to a state in which settings can be changed (hereinafter referred to as "setting change state") and a state in which settings can be confirmed (hereinafter referred to as "setting confirmation state"). First, the power switch 150 is turned off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder 171, and the setting key is turned to turn it on. In order to shift to the setting change state, the power switch 150 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch (sometimes referred to as "RWM clear switch"). On the other hand, to shift to the setting confirmation state, the power switch 150 is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch.

When the setting change state is entered, the number “1” indicating setting 1 is displayed on the setting display unit 173 as the initial value of the game setting, and the setting can be changed by pressing the setting change button 172 . The setting display section 173 is composed of a 7-segment LED that displays a one-digit number. Each time the setting change button 172 is pressed once, the setting values displayed on the setting display section 173 are changed in order of 1→2→3→4→5→6→1→ . . . When the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to the OFF state after changing the setting, the setting value displayed on the setting display section 173 at that time is stored in the setting memory, and the setting change is confirmed. , it becomes a playable state. On the other hand, when shifting to the setting confirmation state, the setting values stored in the setting memory are displayed on the setting display portion 173 . In the setting confirmation state, even if the setting change button 172 is pressed, the setting value displayed on the setting display section 173 does not change, and the setting cannot be changed. After that, when the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to its original state to turn it off, the game becomes ready for play. When the setting key is turned off to enable a game, the setting display section 173 is turned off and the current setting value cannot be visually recognized.

Note that the setting change button 172 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. In this case, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed while the setting key is not turned (setting key OFF state), the RAM is cleared. On the other hand, if the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed while the setting key is turned (setting key ON state), the RAM is cleared and the setting change state is entered. If the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch while the setting key is off, the power is restored without clearing the RAM. On the other hand, if the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch while the setting key is on, the setting confirmation state is entered. Further, the setting display section 173 may also be used as the performance display section 159 . In this case, the combined display section may function as the performance display section 159 in the playable state, and may function as the setting display section 173 in the setting change state or setting confirmation state. In addition, the setting change device 170 may not be provided, and the change of game settings may be disabled.

<Functional block>
FIG. 3 shows functional blocks of the pachinko gaming machine 100. As shown in FIG. Hereinafter, the functions realized by using each configuration will be described. For the part already described as , the term may be used as it is for the sake of convenience.

The pachinko game machine 100 includes a power board 158 that generates power to be used in the game machine based on AC power (AC 24V, etc.) supplied from the outside of the game machine, and a main control device that controls the basic operation of the game and the progress of the game. , a payout control board 155 as a frame control device for controlling the payout of prize balls, a launch control board 157 for controlling the launch of game balls to the game area, and controls the performance operations and processes. It is configured in a form in which the function is shared with the sub-board 300 as a sub-controller.

The main board 200 includes a first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, a big winning port 20, a first operating port 31, a second operating port 32, a group of general winning ports (first general winning port 33a, second general winning port It is electrically connected to the port 33b), the output port 34, the pattern display unit 120, and the external information output terminal 160, and transmits and receives various control signals to and from each of them. The payout control board 155 is electrically connected to the main board 200 , the firing control board 157 and the payout device 154 . The payout control board 155 transmits a launch permission signal to the launch control board 157 based on a signal indicating the control state of the prize ball payout and the main board 200 transmitted from the main board 200, and indirectly controls the launch control board 157. , and the payout of prize balls by the payout device 154 is controlled. Dispensing device 154 includes dispensing motor 166 and ball counting sensor 167 . The firing control board 157 is electrically connected to the payout control board 155, the launching device 156, and the ball feeding device 164, and controls the ball feeding device 164 and the ball feeding device 164 based on a firing permission signal or the like transmitted from the payout control board 155. A device 156 is controlled to shoot a game ball. The sub-board 300 includes the effect display device 60, the movable accessories 66 (the drive motor 67, the position detection sensor 68), the speaker 108, the effect input operation device 115 (the effect button 109, the cross key 110), the decorative lamp 111 and the electrical and transmit and receive various control signals to and from each other.

The main board 200 and the sub-board 300 are configured so that data transmission/reception between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300 is one-way from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300. It is arranged on the sub-board 300 . Since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main substrate 200 to the sub substrate 300 is maintained, data cannot be transmitted from the configuration included in the sub substrate 300 to the configuration included in the main substrate 200. I can't even ask. Therefore, the sub board 300 cannot refer to the information generated by the main board 200 unless the information is transmitted. Further, between the main board 200 and the payout control board 155 , and between the payout control board 155 and the launch control board 157 , data transmission/reception is performed bidirectionally. However, as in the case between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300, data can be sent and received in one direction from the main board 200 to the payout control board 155, or in one direction from the payout control board 155 to the firing control board 157. A configuration for data transmission/reception may be employed.

Each functional block included in the main board 200, the payout control board 155, the firing control board 157, and the sub-board 300, which will be described below, is merely an example. may be installed. For example, the functional blocks included in the main board 200 may be configured to be mounted on the sub-board 300, or the functional blocks included in the firing control board 157 may be configured to be mounted on the payout control board 155. good. Also, for example, a part of the functional blocks included in the main board 200 may be configured to be mounted on the main board 200, and the remaining part may be mounted on the payout control board 155. may be divided and provided on a plurality of substrates so that one functional block is configured as a whole.

<Main board 200>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the main substrate 200. As shown in FIG. The main board 200 includes an entering ball determination means 201, a performance display section 159, a random number generation means 202, a first lottery means 211, a second lottery means 212, a preliminary determination means 235, a normal figure lottery means 213, a reservation control means 240, a main Display control means 250, special game control means 260, small winning game control means 265, specific game control means 270, opening and closing control means 275, special figure adjustment means 276, main initial process execution means 280, main power interruption process execution means 282, It comprises main error detection means 284 , setting change means 286 , setting confirmation means 287 and command communication means 205 .

<Entering ball determination means 201>
The entering ball determining means 201 determines entering of a game ball into each winning hole. The ball entry determination means 201 determines that the game ball has won the first start opening 11 when receiving the first start winning information, and determines that the game ball has won the second starting opening 12 when receiving the second start winning information. to decide. A ball entry judging means 201 judges that the game ball has entered the big prize winning slot 20 when receiving the big winning slot winning information, and judges that the game ball has entered the general winning slot 33 when receiving the general winning slot information. The entering ball determination means 201 determines that the game ball has passed through the first operation opening 31 or the second operation opening 32 when passing information is received. The entering ball determination means 201 determines that the game ball has passed through the out port 34 when receiving the discharge information. The entered ball determination means 201 calculates the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of fired balls, which is the sum of safe balls and out balls, and displays it on the performance display section 159 . The ball-entering determination means 201 calculates the "number of balls paid out"/"number of out-balls"×100 when the probability of winning a big hit is normal probability and normal ball-entering state (so-called low probability and low ball-entering state). is displayed on the performance display unit 159 . Therefore, the performance display section 159 displays the base in the low base state.

<Random Number Generation Means 202>
The random number generating means 202 generates random numbers to be used for various decisions in the first lottery means 211 , the second lottery means 212 and the normal pattern lottery means 213 . Specifically, the random number generation means 202 generates a random number (also referred to as a "lottery value") used in the lottery by the first lottery determination means 221 and the second lottery determination means 222. A range of random numbers is generated by predetermined means. In addition, the random number generating means 202 selects from "0" to "255" as a random number (also referred to as "symbol determination lottery value") used in design determination (symbol lottery) by the first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227. A random number in the range of up to is generated by a predetermined means. In addition, the random number generating means 202 uses "0" to "255 ] is generated by a predetermined means. Also, the random number generating means 202
Generates a random number in the range from "0" to "99" as a random number to be used in the success or failure lottery by the normal pattern lottery means 213 by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 generates a random number in the range of "0" to "2" by a predetermined means as a random number used when determining the normal symbol. In addition, "random number" here refers to physical random numbers generated by a random number generation circuit, true random numbers in a mathematical sense, and pseudo-random numbers such as random numbers using a 16-bit counter and software random numbers using random number generation algorithms. It's okay. Alternatively, random numbers generated by combining hardware random numbers and software random numbers may be used. The random numbers obtained by the first lottery means 211 and the second lottery means 212 may be generated by the same generating means, or may be generated by different generating means. .

<Universal drawing lottery means 213>
The normal pattern lottery means 213 generates a random number used for the lottery for winning or not of the normal pattern and the random number used for determining the stop pattern of the normal pattern when the game ball passes through the first operation port 31 or the second operation port 32. 202 to execute a lottery. The normal symbol lottery means 213 includes a normal symbol determination table (not shown) that is referred to for determination of normal symbols, and a normal symbol determination that is referred to for determination of stop symbols of normal symbols to be displayed on the normal symbol display unit 45. holding a table and The correspondence between the lottery value for win/fail lottery and the win is defined in the normal symbol determination table, and the correspondence between the lottery value for determining the stop symbol and the normal symbol is defined in the normal symbol determination table. Based on the winning probability and the selection probability of the symbol, the success or failure of the normal symbol and the stop symbol are determined. When the lottery value for the success or failure lottery of the normal symbol corresponds to a hit, the normal symbol lottery means 213 determines the stop symbol of the normal symbol with reference to the normal symbol determination table, and the lottery value for the success or failure lottery of the normal symbol is determined. If it falls under the deviation, always determine the mode of the 1 deviation symbol. When the result of the determination of whether or not the normal symbol is a hit corresponds to a hit, and the normal symbol stops in a predetermined pattern (first winning mode or second winning mode), the opening/closing control means 275, which will be described later, determines the mode of the stopped symbol and the game state. The normal electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 is expanded accordingly. The opening time is 0.1 seconds for short opening and 6 seconds for long opening. The lottery value of the normal symbol is temporarily reserved by the reservation control means 240 which will be described later. However, the lottery value is reserved only when it does not exceed the predetermined upper limit number of reservations reserved by the reservation control means 240 .

<First lottery means 211 and second lottery means 212>
The first lottery means 211 includes a first lottery value acquisition means 216, a first success/fail determination means 221, a first symbol determination means 226, and a first variation pattern determination as a function of executing the first lottery related to the first game. A means 231 is included, and a first win/fail lottery is executed as a win/fail lottery corresponding to the ball entering the first starting port 11.例文帳に追加Based on various lottery results by the first lottery means 211, the main display control means 250 causes the first special symbol display section 41 to display the first special symbol 51 in a variable manner. Also, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative pattern 61 is variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 60. FIG. The second lottery means 212 includes a second lottery value acquisition means 217, a second propriety determination means 222, a second symbol determination means 227, and a second variation pattern determination means 232, and corresponds to the ball entering the second starting port 12. A second winning lottery is executed as a winning lottery. Based on various lottery results by the second lottery means 212, the main display control means 250 causes the second special symbol display section 42 to display the second special symbol 52 in a variable manner. Also, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative pattern 61 is variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 60. FIG.

<First Lottery Value Obtaining Means 216 and Second Lottery Value Obtaining Means 217>
The first lottery value acquisition means 216 acquires random numbers for various lotteries and determinations by the first lottery means 211 from the random number generation means 202 when the ball enters the first starting hole 11 . Specifically, the first success/failure lottery value for success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means 221, the first symbol lottery value for determining the stop mode of the first special symbol 51 by the first symbol determination means 226, the first variation pattern A first pattern lottery value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol 51 by the determining means 231 is obtained from the corresponding random number generating means. The second lottery value acquiring means 217 acquires random numbers for various lotteries and determinations by the second lottery means 212 from the random number generating means 202 when the ball enters the second starting hole 12 . Specifically, the second success or failure lottery value for success or failure determination by the second success or failure determination means 222, the second symbol lottery value for determining the stop mode of the second special symbol 52 by the second symbol determination means 227, the second variation pattern A second pattern lottery value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol 52 by the determining means 232 is obtained from the corresponding random number generating means.

The first success/failure determination means 221 executes success/failure determination to determine whether or not to shift to a special game based on the first success/failure lottery value. The second success/failure determination means 222 executes success/failure determination to determine whether or not to shift to a special game based on the second success/failure lottery value. In the success/failure determination, more specifically, "big hit" indicating transition to a special game, "small hit" indicating transition to a small hit game, " It is determined whether it corresponds to "out of". The first right/wrong judgment means 221 and the second right/wrong judgment means 222 hold a right/wrong judgment table referred to in the right/wrong judgment. In addition, in order to distinguish the success/failure determination to be executed at the time of starting the pattern variation from the prior success/failure determination described later, it is also appropriately referred to as "the success/failure determination as the main determination". In this specification, when the term "table" or "selection criteria" is used, the relationship between the first parameter such as the lottery value and the second parameter such as the value indicating the option is strictly defined in the table structure. It not only refers to data, but also broadly includes implementation by a program structure that derives a second parameter from a first parameter as such a correspondence relationship. The concept including them is substantially synonymous with the "table" and is appropriately referred to as "selection criteria". When a table structure is used, substantially one type of selection criteria may be composed of a combination of a plurality of structurally subdivided tables. It shows the number of actual types of tables, not the number of tables that have been formatted.

The first right/wrong determination means 221 and the second right/wrong determination means 222 hold tables corresponding to respective right/wrong determinations as right/wrong determination tables referred to in the right/wrong determination. Specifically, a right/wrong determination table for right/wrong determination by the first right/wrong determination means 221 (also referred to as a "first right/wrong determination table") and a right/wrong determination table for right/wrong determination by the second right/wrong determination means 222 ("second (also referred to as "validity judgment table") is held, and a table to be referred to is selected according to the validity judgment to be executed. Judgment results of big hits, small wins, and misses are associated with winning/failing lottery values in a plurality of winning/failing determination tables, and winning/failing probabilities are determined according to the range setting of the associated big wins. In addition, a plurality of types of win/fail judgment tables corresponding to a plurality of game settings are prepared. is prepared. In addition, when the probability of a big hit, a small win, and a loss is the same among a plurality of game settings, a winning/failure determination table that is common to the plurality of game settings may be prepared.

FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing a propriety determination table. This figure shows a win-or-fail determination table corresponding to a specific game setting, and shows a win-fail determination table corresponding to setting 6. FIG. In the hit/fail determination table of this figure, the determination results of big wins, small wins, and misses are associated with the win/fail lottery values. is determined. The first right/wrong judgment means 221 and the second right/wrong judgment means 222 refer to the right/wrong judgment table of this figure in the right/wrong judgment as the main judgment. In both of the first success/failure lottery by the first success/failure determination means 221 and the second success/failure lottery by the second success/failure determination means 222, a big win is usually made only when the success/failure lottery value falls within the range of 0-299. When the odds are variable, the range of the big win is expanded, and the big win is achieved not only when the win/fail lottery value falls within the range of 0-299, but also when it falls within the range of 300-2999. Thus, the range corresponding to the big hit changes according to the game state. In this figure, a single hit/fail determination table shows the jackpot range for both normal and variable probability, but the hit/fail determination table may be prepared separately for normal time and for variable probability. It may be separately prepared for the first win/fail lottery and the second win/fail lottery.

In this embodiment, even if the winning/failure lottery value does not fall within the big winning range, it will be a small winning if it falls within a predetermined range. In the example of this figure, if the winning lottery value acquired by the first winning judgment means 221 falls within the range of 56500 to 65535, it becomes a small hit, and the winning lottery value acquired by the second winning judgment means 222 is 64000 to 65535. If it falls within the range, it will be a small hit. That is, the first win/fail lottery has a wider range of small wins than the second win/fail lottery, and the small wins are more likely to occur. In this way, when it does not correspond to the big hit, it is originally all "missing", but in the example of this figure, the winning or not lottery value range when it does not correspond to the small hit among the cases where it does not correspond to the big hit is especially expressed as "outside". In other words, when "win or fail" is understood from the viewpoint of "whether it is a big hit or not", "minor win" may be included in the broad sense of "loss" in the sense of "not a big hit". Further, when "win or fail" is understood from the viewpoint of "hit or not", "minor win" and "big win" may be included in the broad definition of "hit". In this figure, an example is shown in which the determination table for whether or not the big hit is made and the determination table for whether or not the small win is made are realized in the form of a single winning or not judgment table. good. Further, the "small win" may be provided only in one of the first game and the second game, or may be provided in neither game. In that case, the value corresponding to the small hit is not set in the corresponding success/fail determination table.

FIG. 6 schematically shows the range setting of the winning lottery value for each set value. FIG. 1(a) shows the correspondence relationship between the first win/fail lottery value acquired by the first win/fail determination means 221 and the win/fail determination result. FIG. 2(b) shows the correspondence relationship between the second win/fail lottery value acquired by the second win/fail determination means 222 and the win/fail determination result. The range of the first winning lottery value and the second winning lottery value that will be a big hit at normal time and probability change is 0 to 294 if the setting value is "1", 0 to 295 if the setting value is "2", and the setting value is " 0 to 296 if the set value is "3", 0 to 297 if the set value is "4", 0 to 298 if the set value is "5", and 0 to 299 if the set value is "6". Therefore, the larger the set value, the greater the range of winning/losing lottery values that result in a big win in the normal time, and the probability of winning a big win in the normal time increases. In addition, the range of the first winning lottery value and the second winning lottery value that will be a big hit only at the time of probability change (that is, the loss in normal times) is 295 to 2949 if the setting value is "1", and if the setting value is "2". 296 to 2959 if the setting value is "3", 297 to 2969 if the setting value is "4", 298 to 2979 if the setting value is "4", 299 to 2989 if the setting value is "5", and if the setting value is "6", 300-2999. Therefore, the greater the set value, the greater the range of winning/losing lottery values that will result in a big win at the time of variable probability, and the higher the probability of winning a big win at the time of variable probability. The range of winning/losing lottery values is determined so that the ratio between the normal big win probability of winning a big win in a normal time and the big winning probability of winning a big win in a variable probability is constant irrespective of the set value. In this figure, the range of winning/losing lottery values is determined so that the variable probability jackpot probability is 10 times the normal jackpot probability, and is common to all set values "1" to "6". . In addition, the range of win/fail lottery values is determined so that the probability of winning a small win is constant regardless of the set value. In all set values "1" to "6", if the range of the first winning lottery value falls within 56500 to 65535, it will be a small hit, and if the range of the second winning lottery value corresponds to 64000 to 65535, it will be a small hit. It hits. The range of win/fail lottery values outside the range of a big win or a small win is "off". In this figure, the big win probability is different for each set value, but the correspondence relationship between the win/loss lottery value and the win/fail judgment result may be determined so that the big win probability is the same for different set values.

<First Symbol Determination Means 226 and Second Symbol Determination Means 227>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 determine the stop symbol at the start of symbol fluctuation based on the symbol lottery value obtained from the random number generating means 202 and the result of the winning/losing determination. . The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 hold a plurality of symbol determination tables that are referred to for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol. Specifically, the first symbol determination means 226 holds a plurality of symbol determination tables corresponding to the results of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means 221, A plurality of symbol determination tables are held according to the determination result. A first win/fail determination means 221 holds a first pattern determination table for big wins to be referred to when winning big, a first symbol determination table for small wins to be referred to for small wins, and a first symbol determination table for loss to be referred to when losing. A second win/fail determination means 222 holds a second pattern determination table for big wins to be referred to for big wins, a second symbol determination table for small wins to be referred to for small wins, and a second symbol determination table for misses to be referred to for misses. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 select the symbol determination table to be referred to according to the result of the success/failure determination. In addition, in order to distinguish the symbol determination to be executed when the symbol variation is started from the preliminary symbol determination described later, it is also appropriately called "symbol determination as the final determination".

FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol determination table. FIG. 7(a) is a table to be referred to when the hit/fail judgment result is a big hit, FIG. 7(b) is a table to be referred to when the hit/fail judgment result is a miss, and FIG. 7(c) is a This is a table to be referred to when the result of winning/failure determination is a small hit. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 refer to the symbol determination table of this figure in the symbol determination as the final determination. Each symbol determination table defines the correspondence relationship between the numbers "0" to "10" indicating the types of special symbols and the first symbol lottery value or the second symbol lottery value. The types of special symbols are associated with the judgment results of big wins, small wins, and misses, respectively. "10" corresponds to an out. Each type is assigned a plurality of special symbols, that is, a plurality of generally meaningless symbols formed by combining segments.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), special symbol types "0" to "4" are associated with the presence or absence of a big hit and probability fluctuation after the big hit. Specifically, the type “0” indicates a 16R jackpot with a probability variation as a specific jackpot, and is associated with “0 to 99” in the case of the first symbol lottery value, and “0 to 99” in the case of the second symbol lottery value. 144”. Type "1" indicates a 4R jackpot (or "actual 4R hit") with probability variation as a specific jackpot, and is associated with "100 to 149" in the case of the first design lottery value, and in the case of the second design lottery value It is associated with "145 to 149". The type "2" indicates a 2R big hit with variable probability, and the type "2" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value of "150 to 189". Type "3" indicates a 16R jackpot that does not involve probability variation as a normal jackpot. Type "4" indicates a 4R jackpot that does not involve probability variation as a normal jackpot, and type "4" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value of "230 to 255". In this way, the selection probability for each jackpot type (that is, the contents of the jackpot and whether or not there is a change in probability thereafter) is determined by the size of the range of the symbol lottery values.

In addition, it is also possible to provide more types of special patterns, and in that case, by configuring so that one jackpot type is determined corresponding to a plurality of types of special patterns, it is possible to increase the number of types of patterns and increase the number of jackpots. You can set less types. Alternatively, it is possible to subdivide into a larger number of types of jackpots corresponding to the increased number of symbol types. Furthermore, it is possible to provide different symbol types for the first lottery and the second lottery. In this case, one kind of jackpot is determined so as to correspond to each of the kind of special symbols selected at the time of the first lottery and the kind of special symbols selected at the time of the second lottery. However, it is desirable to set the ratio of the probability change to be the same between the first lottery and the second lottery.

As shown in FIG. 7(b), the type "10" is associated with the symbol lottery values of the entire range when the winning/failing determination result is out. Therefore, it is decided that the same special symbol should always be stop-displayed in the case of being out. It should be noted that it is also possible to provide a plurality of special symbols that are stopped and displayed in the case of being out.

As shown in FIG. 7(c), special symbol types "5" to "9" are associated with small hits. The type "5" is associated with the symbol lottery value range "0-49", and the type "6" is associated with the symbol lottery value range "50-99". The type "7" is associated with the range of symbol lottery values "100 to 149", the type "8" is associated with the range of symbol lottery values "150 to 199", and the type "9" is the range of symbol lottery values. It is associated with "200 to 255".

In this embodiment, the table of FIG. 7 is referred to as a preliminary symbol determination table also in the preliminary symbol determination in order to save the storage area in the main board 200. FIG. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 indicate the type of the special symbol as a result of the preliminary symbol determination, indicating that the value is the first winning lottery or the second winning lottery. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the indicated value and the number of pending. In addition, as the preliminary symbol determination table, a table that is further subdivided to enable execution of complicated determination, or a simple one that summarizes the determination range of big hit symbols for executing a similar special game may be used. . In addition, when the pattern is uniformly determined at the time of loss as in the present embodiment, a specific pattern can be selected without referring to the acquired symbol lottery value and without preparing a pattern determination table for loss. may decide.

<First variation pattern determining means 231 and second variation pattern determining means 232>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first variation pattern determining means 231 obtains from the random number generating means 202 the variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation to be displayed on the first special symbol display unit 41 and the effect display device 60 is determined. It is determined from among a plurality of variation patterns based on one pattern lottery value. The second variation pattern determination means 232 uses the second pattern lottery value obtained from the random number generation means 202 as the variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation to be displayed on the second special symbol display unit 42 and the effect display device 60 is determined. Based on this, it is determined from among a plurality of variation patterns. The first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 refer to the variation pattern table to determine the variation pattern of the symbol variation when starting the symbol variation. In addition, the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 perform preliminary pattern determination as to which variation pattern range the pattern lottery value corresponds to. The first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232, and the control means of the main substrate 200 include a variation pattern table to be referred to for determining the variation pattern when the variation start condition is satisfied, and a change pattern table to the start port. Each holds or shares a pre-pattern determination table used to generate information for determination of execution of look-ahead processing at the time of ball entry. In the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time from the start of fluctuation to the stop when the special symbol is variably displayed is determined, and the fluctuation time varies depending on the type. That is, for each variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation is determined, a variation display time is substantially determined for each pattern as a termination condition of the symbol variation, and when the variation display time elapses, the special symbols are displayed. is stopped from changing. Incidentally, the variation pattern determination to be executed at the time of starting the pattern variation is also appropriately called "variation pattern determination as the main determination" in order to distinguish it from the preliminary pattern determination. In addition, in order to contribute to the selection of the variation effect pattern of the decorative design to be described later, it may be defined as different types of variation patterns with the same variation time.

FIG. 8 is a diagram schematically showing a variation pattern table. The first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 refer to the table of this figure (a) in the normal state, and refer to the table of this figure (b) in the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 8(a), if the success/failure determination result is out of the normal state, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 4, select "Super 1", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "0", If the pattern lottery value is 5 to 9, "Super 2", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "1", is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 10 to 19, select "normal 1" which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "2", and if the pattern lottery value is 20 to 29, select "normal 2”. If the pattern lottery value is 30 to 255, the pattern range number "4" and "no reach out" are selected. As "no reach out", different variation patterns are selected according to the number of holds, 10 seconds variation pattern when the number of holds is 0 to 2, 7 seconds variation pattern when the number of holds is 3, number of holds is 4, a variation pattern of 4 seconds is selected.

In this figure, an example in which five types are mainly classified according to the variation time will be described. A plurality of variation performance patterns are prepared for each variation pattern on the sub-board 300, and there are dozens of variation performance patterns in total. is associated with the lottery value range of each classification.

The range of pattern lottery values assigned to "Normal 1", "Normal 2", and "No Reach Out" also varies depending on the number of holds. When the number of reservations is 0, 1, it is as shown in this figure (a), but as the number of reservations increases, the lottery value range of "normal 1" and "normal 2" narrows, and the lottery value of "no reach out" Wider range. The smaller the number of reservations, the wider the lottery value range of the variation pattern with a relatively long variation time, and the probability that the variation pattern with a long variation time is selected increases. Therefore, the smaller the number of reservations, the longer the average fluctuation time, and the larger the number of reservations, the shorter the average fluctuation time. By using a variation pattern table in which the correspondence relationship between the pattern lottery value range and the variation pattern differs for each number of reservations, it is possible to realize control in which a variation pattern with a long variation time is likely to be selected when the number of reservations decreases.

If the success/failure determination result is a 4R jackpot or a 16R jackpot in the normal state, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 123, select "Super 1", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "5", and the pattern lottery value is If it is 124 to 248, it selects "Super 2" which is the super reach of the pattern range number "6". If the pattern lottery value is 249 to 252, select "normal 1" which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "7", and if the pattern lottery value is 253 to 255, select "normal 2”.

In the normal state, when the success/failure determination result is a 2R big hit or a small hit, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 122, select "Super 3", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "9", and the pattern lottery value is If it is 123 to 255, it selects "normal 3" which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "10".

When the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 transmit the pre-determination result to the effect determination means 303 as a so-called look-ahead result, the value of the pattern range number (0 to 10) is It is transmitted together with a value indicating whether it is the lottery or the second lottery, and the number of pending lotteries. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 8, the preliminary pattern determination is exemplified so as to have a table for each success/failure determination result. In addition to deriving only information about the range in which it is positioned, the control means of the sub-board 300 may be controlled so as to determine what kind of variation is to be performed along with the result of the preliminary suitability determination.

In the variation pattern table of FIG. 8B that is referred to in the time saving state, pattern lottery values are assigned to all variation patterns for time saving. However, the correspondence relationship between the range of the pattern lottery value and the variation time is the same as in FIG. "No reach out, shortened" is a variation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time that is associated with the same lottery value range and pattern range number as the "no reach out" in FIG. 8(a). "Reach without reach shortening" also selects a different variation pattern depending on the number of holds, 10 seconds variation pattern when the number of holds is 0, 1, 1 second variation pattern when the number of holds is 2 to 4 are selected respectively. The first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 may refer to different variation pattern tables, or may refer to different variation pattern tables depending on the game state. For example, in a gaming machine in which the second lottery is set to be more advantageous than the first lottery, and the second lottery is given priority over the first lottery, the ball-entering state is easy due to the time saving. A situation in which the holding of the second lottery is exhausted and the first lottery is continuously executed is not preferable for the player. Therefore, in the loss fluctuation in the first lottery in the easy-to-enter state, a fluctuation pattern table in which a long-time (for example, 10 seconds) fluctuation pattern that does not shorten the fluctuation time is uniformly selected regardless of the number of reservations is referred to. You can do it.

<Holding control means 240>
Returning to FIG. 4 , the reservation control means 240 includes a special figure reservation means 241 and a normal figure reservation means 242 . When the special figure holding means 241 newly acquires the first winning lottery value or the second winning lottery value, the symbol variation corresponding to the first winning lottery value or the second winning lottery value acquired before that. is displayed, the start of pattern variation corresponding to the newly obtained first win/fail lottery value or second win/fail lottery value is suspended, and the win/fail lottery value is stored until the start of the variation display of the corresponding pattern. Here, for the first special symbols, the upper limit is four, and the first success or failure lottery value, the first pattern lottery value, and the first pattern lottery value are stored, and the second special symbols are each four, A second lottery value, a second pattern lottery value, and a second pattern lottery value are stored. The normal pattern reservation means 242 stores the normal pattern lottery value acquired by the normal pattern lottery means 213 as a reserved ball. These pending numbers are represented by the number of lights or the number of flashes of the first special figure pending display portion 71, the second special figure pending display portion 72, and the normal figure pending display portion 75, respectively. The number of reservations by the special figure reservation means 241 is also displayed on the effect display device 60. - 特許庁

The lottery value of the second success/failure lottery retained in the special figure retention means 241 is preferentially digested over the lottery value of the first success/failure lottery, and the pattern variation is displayed. Therefore, even if the big win lottery value is reserved as the first win/fail lottery, as long as the lottery value is held as the second win/fail lottery, the pattern variation corresponding to the big win lottery value of the first win/fail lottery is not displayed. Therefore, even if the big win is reserved in the first win/fail lottery, by continuing to beat until the big win is held in the second win/fail lottery, there is a possibility that a plurality of continuous big wins can be obtained.

<Main display control means 250>
The main display control means 250 includes a first special figure control means 251 , a second special figure control means 252 and a general figure control means 254 . The first special symbol control means 251 displays the variation of the first special symbol 51 on the first special symbol display section 41 according to the variation pattern determined corresponding to the determination result of the first winning lottery by the first lottery means 211. Let The first special figure control means 251 makes it a condition for starting a new pattern variation that the variation display of the symbols corresponding to the first win/fail lottery or the second win/fail lottery performed before is completed. The second special symbol control means 252 displays the variation of the second special symbol 52 on the second special symbol display section 42 according to the variation pattern determined corresponding to the determination result of the second winning lottery by the second lottery means 212. Let The second special figure control means 252 also makes the completion of the fluctuation display of the symbols corresponding to the first win/fail lottery or the second win/fail lottery made before that a new symbol variation start condition.

The first special figure control means 251 reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first success/failure lottery when the success/failure lottery value of the second success/failure lottery is stored by the special figure retention means 241.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the second special figure control means 252 starts the symbol variation display corresponding to the second success or failure lottery regardless of whether or not the success or failure lottery value of the first success or failure lottery is stored by the special figure reservation means 241.例文帳に追加Thus, when the lottery values are reserved for both the first win/fail lottery and the second win/fail lottery, the lottery value held for the second win/fail lottery is preferentially read and the pattern variation is displayed. In such a case, the lottery value withheld in the first lottery is not read out and the symbol variation does not start until the number of pending lotteries in the second lottery becomes zero.

The first special figure control means 251 and the second special figure control means 252 are changed by the command communication means 205 described later at the timing to start and stop the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. A start command and a variation stop command are transmitted to the effect determination means 303 (sub-main). When transmitting the variation start command, the value indicating each of the success/failure determination result, the stop pattern, and the variation pattern determined or determined as this determination, and the value indicating whether it is the first success/failure lottery or the second success/failure lottery It is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 together with the variation start command. When the fluctuation stop command is transmitted, the value indicating the stop pattern is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the fluctuation stop command. In addition, the effect determination means 303 (sub-main) transmits a variation start command, a change stop command, etc. to the effect control means 304 in order to control the variable display of the decorative symbols by the effect control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the variable display by the main display control means 250 and the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) are synchronized and interlocking is maintained. The normal pattern control means 254 causes the normal pattern display section 45 to display the determination result of the lottery by the normal pattern lottery means 213 as the fluctuation display of the normal pattern.

<Special Figure Adjustment Means 276>
The special figure adjustment means 276 waits the start of the other variation display while one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is variably displayed. The special figure adjusting means 276 is the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 12, regardless of the order in which the game ball entered the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12. The variable display of 52 is prioritized over the variable display of the first special symbol 51 based on the ball entering the first starting port 11.例文帳に追加For example, when both the first win/fail lottery value and the second win/fail lottery value are reserved, the second win/fail lottery value is always preferentially consumed and the second special pattern 52 is continuously varied and displayed.

In addition, the special figure adjustment means 276 in the modified example changes the variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the variation display of the second special symbol 52 according to the order of entering the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 It may be selectively variably displayed. For example, when the ball is entered in the order of the first starting port 11, the first starting port 11, and the second starting port 12, the display fluctuates in the order of the first special symbol 51, the first special symbol 51, and the second special symbol 52. be done. In this case, the special figure adjustment means 276 monitors the reservation control means 240 and stores the reservation order of the success or failure lottery value. Which special symbol should be varied is determined according to the order of game ball entry, that is, the retention order of the winning lottery value in the retention control means 240, so the player can easily grasp the variation order visually.

The special figure adjustment means 276 in another modification may display the variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the variation display of the second special symbol 52 in a predetermined digestion order regardless of the order of entry. good. For example, priority may be given to alternately displaying the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52 . For example, when both the first winning lottery value and the second winning lottery value are reserved, the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed alternately. Which special symbol should be changed is simply alternated regardless of the order of game ball entry, so the player can intuitively grasp the order of change.

The special figure adjusting means 276 also waits for the start of the other variable display when one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a winning manner. In this case, since the variable display of the special symbols is not started while the special game is being executed, the player can concentrate on the special game.

<Preliminary determination means 235>
The prior determination means 235 includes a first lottery prior determination means 236 and a second lottery prior determination means 237 . The first lottery prior determination means 236 includes the first success/failure determination means 221 and the first symbol determination means 22.
6, before the execution of various determinations by the first variation pattern determination means 231, using the various random numbers acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 before the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol by the first special figure control means 251 Predetermine information about variability. The second lottery pre-determination means 237, the second lottery value acquisition means 217 various random numbers acquired by the second lottery value acquisition means 217 before executing various determinations by the second success/failure determination means 222, the second symbol determination means 227, and the second variation pattern determination means 232 Before the start of the variation of the second special symbol by the second special symbol control means 252 using the information about the variation is determined in advance.

The first lottery prior determination means 236 includes a first prior lottery value determination table, a first prior symbol lottery value determination table, and a first prior variation pattern random value determination as determination tables for prior determination of the first lottery means 211. hold the table. The first lottery prior determination means 236 determines the random number group to which the first lottery value stored in the special figure reservation means 241 belongs using the first lottery value determination table. The first lottery prior determination means 236 determines the random number group to which the first symbol lottery value stored in the special figure reservation means 241 belongs using the first prior symbol lottery value determination table. The first lottery prior determination means 236 determines the random number group to which the first variation pattern lottery value stored in the special figure reservation means 241 belongs using the first prior variation pattern determination table. These determination results are temporarily stored as preliminary determination results, and information about the preliminary determination results is transmitted to the sub board 300 by command communication means 205 (sub control command transmission means 207), which will be described later.

FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically showing a prior validity determination table referred to in prior validity determination. The first lottery prior determination means 236 (preliminary success/failure determination for the first game) refers to the first prior success/failure lottery value determination table in FIG. is "0 to 299", the value of "1" indicating that is set as the result of the prior suitability determination. If the winning lottery value is "300 to 2999", the value "2" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. If the winning lottery value is "3000 to 56499", a value of "3" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. If the winning lottery value is "56500 to 65535", the value "4" indicating that is set as the prior winning judgment result. Next, referring to the first preliminary symbol lottery value determination table (not shown), if the first symbol lottery value is "0 to 99", the value of "0" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. . When the first symbol lottery value is "100 to 149", the value of "1" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. If the first symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", a value of "2" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", a value of "3" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "230 to 255", the value of "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. Furthermore, referring to the first preliminary variation pattern random value determination table (not shown), if the first pattern lottery value is "0 to 9", the value of "A" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. . If the first pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", the value "B" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. If the first pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", the value of "C" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. As described above, the preliminary determination information set by the first lottery preliminary determination means 236 (preliminary determination regarding the first game) is performed by the command communication means 205 (sub control command transmission means 207) described later. It is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 in accordance with the transmission timing of the information indicating the entry of the ball (indicating that it is the first lottery), the information indicating the number of pending balls, and the like.

The second lottery prior determination means 237 (preliminary success/failure determination for the second game) refers to the second prior success/failure lottery value determination table in FIG. If the value is "0 to 299", the value of "1" indicating that is set as the preliminary suitability determination result. If the winning lottery value is "300 to 2999", the value "2" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. If the winning lottery value is "3000 to 63999", the value "3" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. If the winning lottery value is "64000 to 65535", the value "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. Next, referring to the second preliminary symbol lottery value determination table (not shown), if the second symbol lottery value is "0 to 144", the value of "0" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. . If the second symbol lottery value is "145 to 149", the value "1" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", a value of "2" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", the value of "3" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "230 to 255", the value of "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. Furthermore, referring to the second preliminary variation pattern random value judgment table (not shown), if the second pattern lottery value is "0 to 9", the value of "A" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern judgment result. . If the second pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", the value "B" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. If the second pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", the value of "C" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. As described above, the preliminary determination information set by the second lottery preliminary determination means 237 (preliminary right or wrong determination regarding the second game) is transmitted to the second start port 12 by the command communication means 205 (sub control command transmission means 207) described later. (Indicating that it is a second lottery), information indicating the number of pending balls, etc. are transmitted to the effect determining means 303 in accordance with the transmission timing.

The various types of information temporarily stored as the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination means 235 are stored in a predetermined preliminary determination result storage area with an upper limit of 4, similarly to the number of reserved storages. It should be noted that the pre-determination result may be stored using the reservation storage area that the reservation control means 240 stores. The information may be erased based on transmission of the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination means 235 to the effect determination means 303 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207), which will be described later. In this way, by sharing with other areas and erasing information based on the completion of transmission, efficient use of the storage area in the main board 200 can be expected. Further, as the determination table for preliminary determination, the determination table for main determination may be used without providing a table dedicated to preliminary determination, and the preliminary determination regarding the first game and the preliminary determination regarding the second game may be performed. A part or all of them may share a common pre-determination table. In this way, by sharing this table with other determination tables, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the main board 200 . It should be noted that the content to be transmitted as the determination result of the prior determination means 235 can be appropriately selected, such as transmitting only the determination result of acceptance or rejection, for example. In addition, the random number values acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 and the second lottery value acquisition means 217 are transmitted to the sub-board 300 by the command communication means 205 without being judged by the advance judgment means 235, and the sub-board 300 may be configured to determine the content of the preliminary determination.

The prior determination means 235 may refer to a prior success/failure lottery value determination table in which the correspondence relationship between the success/failure lottery value and the prior success/failure determination result differs according to the setting value set by the setting change device 170 . As with the win/loss determination table described above, a plurality of types of pre-win/fail lottery value determination tables corresponding to a plurality of game settings may be prepared, and the pre-win/fail lottery value determination table to be referred to may be switched according to the set values of the game settings. In addition, a pre-win/fail lottery value determination table that can be used in common among a plurality of game settings may be used. In this case, the win/loss may be pre-determined by a combination of the set value of the game setting and the value of the pre-win/fail determination result.

FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing a prior success/failure determination table corresponding to game settings. FIG. 3(a) is a prior determination table referred to by the first lottery prior determination means 236, and FIG. 4(b) is a prior determination table referred to by the second lottery prior determination means 237. If the win/loss lottery value is "0 to 294", the result of the prior win/fail determination is "11", indicating that all the settings 1 to 6 will result in a big win. When the win/loss lottery value is "295", the result of prior win/loss determination is "12", indicating that a big win is achieved in the normal setting of 2 or more or in all settings in the variable probability. If the winning lottery value is "296", the preliminary winning judgment result is "13", and the normal setting is 3.
Shows that it will be a big hit with all settings above or at the time of probability variation. When the win/loss lottery value is "297", the result of the prior win/loss determination is "14", indicating that a big win is achieved in the normal setting of 4 or more or in all the settings in the variable probability. When the win/loss lottery value is "298", the result of prior win/fail determination is "15", indicating that a big win is achieved in the normal setting of 5 or more or in all settings in the variable probability. When the win/loss lottery value is "299", the prior win/loss determination result is "16", indicating that a big win is achieved with the normal setting of 6 or all the settings during the variable probability. Also, when the win/loss lottery value is "300 to 2949", the result of the prior win/loss determination is "21", indicating that all the settings at the time of probability change will result in a big win. If the win/loss lottery value is "2950 to 2959", the result of prior win/loss determination is "22", indicating that a big hit is achieved at the setting of 2 or higher at the time of variable probability. When the win/loss lottery value is "2960 to 2969", the prior win/loss judgment result is "23", which indicates that a big win is achieved when the odds are set to 3 or higher. When the win/loss lottery value is "2970 to 2979", the result of prior win/loss determination is "23", indicating that a big hit is achieved when the odds are set to 4 or higher. When the win/loss lottery value is "2980 to 2989", the prior win/loss determination result is "25", indicating that a big win is achieved when the odds are set to 5 or more. When the win/loss lottery value is "2990 to 2999", the prior win/loss determination result is "26", indicating that the setting 6 at the time of probability variation will result in a big hit. Furthermore, when the first lottery value shown in (a) is "3000 to 56499", and when the second lottery value shown in (b) is "3000 to 63999", the preliminary judgment result is " 30”, indicating that it will be a small hit in all settings. In addition, when the first lottery value shown in (a) is "56500 to 65535", and when the second lottery value shown in (b) is "64000 to 65535", the advance judgment result is " 40”, indicating that it is out in all settings. By using such a prior success/failure determination table, it is possible to show an appropriate prior success/failure determination result for each game setting value.

<Special game control means 260>
The special game control means 260 operates the special game when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode when the first win/fail lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in the transition to the special game. A special game is executed by determining that a condition is met and opening the big winning hole 20.例文帳に追加Similarly, the special game control means 260, when the second winning lottery by the second lottery means 212 results in indicating the transition to the special game, when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode. A special game is executed by determining that a special game operating condition is established and opening a big winning hole 20.例文帳に追加

The special game is a game in which the operation of opening and closing the big winning opening 20 is continued a plurality of times, and is composed of a plurality of unit games. The special game includes a 16R jackpot in which a unit game is repeated 16 times, a 4R jackpot in which a unit game is repeated four times, and a 2R jackpot in which a unit game whose opening time is shorter than the 16R jackpot and the 4R jackpot is repeated twice. The 16R jackpot is a jackpot in the second lottery, and the 4R jackpot is a jackpot in the first lottery. In the 16R big win and 4R big win, the big winning opening 20 is opened for about 30 seconds in principle in one unit game. In the 2R jackpot, the big prize opening 20 is opened for about 1.6 seconds in one unit game. The special game control means 260 terminates the special game when the set number of rounds of the unit game is consumed. Even in the case of a 2R jackpot, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, the big prize opening 20 may be opened in the same manner as the 16R jackpot and the 4R jackpot.

<Small hit game control means 265>
A small winning game control means 265 operates a small winning game when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined small winning manner when the first lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in a small winning. A small winning game is executed by judging that the condition is established and causing the opening/closing control means 275 to open the big winning opening 20.例文帳に追加Similarly, when the second lottery by the second lottery means 212 results in a small hit, the small hit game control means 265 determines that when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined small hit mode, the small win game control means 265 A small winning game is executed by determining that a winning game operation condition is established and causing the opening/closing control means 275 to open the big winning opening 20.例文帳に追加

In the small winning game, the unit game is executed once, and the big winning opening 20 is opened and closed twice in one unit game. The small winning game control means 265 opens the big winning hole 20 for only about 1.6 seconds per opening and closing, and then closes the big winning hole 20 to end the small winning game.

<Specific game control means 270>
The specific game control means 270 controls the normal game in the probability variable state, the time saving state, and the ball easy state. A specific game control means 270 shifts the game state to a variable probability state, a time saving state and an easy ball entry state after the end of the special game when the special pattern is a pattern of a specific jackpot accompanied by a transition to a variable probability. The variable probability state, the time saving state and the easy ball entry state are continued until the next big hit occurs. In the time saving state, the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 select a variation pattern with a short variation time so that the variation display time of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is generally shortened. do. However, in a normal state, reference is made to the variation pattern table corresponding to the number of retentions of the lottery value by the retention control means 240, and as the number of retentions by the retention control means 240 decreases, a variation pattern with a longer variation time tends to appear. In the easy-to-enter state, both the probability variation of normal symbols and the opening extension of the second starting port 12, or only the opening extension of the second starting port 12 are performed. That is, the specific game control means 270 makes the second starting port 12 open extended state when the specific jackpot is obtained, and further increases the winning probability of the open lottery only when the winning lottery is the second winning lottery. It shifts to a probability variable state higher than the normal probability state. During the variable probability state, the probability that the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means 221 and the second success/failure determination means 222 is a big hit is maintained at a high value.

<Opening/closing control means 275>
The opening/closing control means 275 controls the opening/closing of the ordinary electric accessory 90 of the second starting opening 12 and the big winning opening 20 . The opening/closing control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 to open the normal electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 when the normal pattern is stopped in a specific manner. The opening/closing control means 275 opens the second starting port 12 with a short or long opening time according to the result of the opening lottery in the normal state, and opens the second start port 12 with a long opening time in the easy-to-enter state. 2 Open the starting port 12 . The ease of entering a ball into the second starting port 12 is enhanced so that the player can continue the game without reducing the number of balls he has. The opening/closing control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the big winning gate solenoid 92 to open the big winning gate 20 in the special game.

<Main initial processing execution means 280, main power failure processing execution means 282, main error detection means 284>
The main initial process executing means 280 executes the control start process of the main board 200 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on or when the power is restored. The main power-off process execution means 282 executes an abnormality handling process such as a power-off process in the main substrate 200 when a power failure such as a power failure occurs. The main error detection means 284 executes abnormality detection processing in the main board 200 . The control start processing, abnormality handling processing, and abnormality detection processing of the main board 200 will be described later.

<Setting Changing Means 286, Setting Confirming Means 287>
The setting change means 286 executes a "setting change process" for changing game settings. When the power switch 150 is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed while the setting key cylinder 171 is in the ON state, the setting change means 286 shifts to the setting change state described above. The setting change unit 286 causes the setting display unit 173 to display the setting values stored in the setting memory when the state is changed to the setting change state. The setting change unit 286 sequentially changes the setting values displayed on the setting display unit 173 in response to pressing of the setting change button 172 in the order of 1→2→3→4→5→6→1→ . , the setting value stored in the setting memory is updated to the same value as displayed on the setting display section 173 . When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting change means 286 terminates the setting change state and turns off the setting display section 173 .

The setting confirmation means 287 executes a "setting confirmation process" for confirming game settings. If the power switch 150 is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch while the setting key cylinder 171 is in the ON state, the setting confirmation means 287 shifts to the setting confirmation state described above. The setting confirmation unit 287 causes the setting display unit 173 to display the setting values stored in the setting memory when the state is shifted to the setting confirmation state. Unlike the setting change unit 286 described above, the setting confirmation unit 287 does not change the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 even if the setting change button 172 is pressed, and also updates the setting value stored in the setting memory. do not do. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting confirmation means 287 terminates the setting confirmation state and turns off the setting display section 173 .

The setting value data managed by the setting memory may be numbers "0" to "5" instead of numbers "1" to "6". In this case, setting value "0" corresponds to setting 1, setting value "1" corresponds to setting 2, setting value "2" corresponds to setting 3, and setting value "3" corresponds to setting 4. , setting value “4” may correspond to setting 5, and setting value “5” may correspond to setting 6. By using "0" as the normal value of the set value data, when the RAM is cleared when the RAM is abnormal and the set value data is set to the initial value "0", it will not be determined to be abnormal. can be simplified. In addition, when executing a lottery using the set value data, for example, when selecting different tables or data for each set value in the prefetch process, there is an advantage that the offset processing for the selection can be simplified. . For example, when "1" to "6" are used as set value data, additional processing such as decrementing the start address by -1 is required when using these values as they are as offset data for table or data selection. On the other hand, when "0" to "5" are used as the set value data, the numerical value of the set value data can be used as the offset data. In addition, the setting changing means 286 and the setting confirming means 287 may display the numerical values of the setting value data as they are on the setting display section 173 when numerical values of "0" to "5" are used as the setting value data. A numerical value obtained by adding +1 to the numerical value of the value data may be displayed on the setting display section 173 . In the latter case, the numeric data of "0" to "5" are converted into the numeric values of setting 1 to setting 6 in the game setting and displayed, so that the display can be easily understood by the manager of the gaming machine.

<Command transmission means>
The command communication means 205 includes a payout control command communication means 206 that transmits control commands necessary for executing payout and the like to the payout control board 155, and a sub-controller that transmits control commands necessary for executing performance control and the like to the sub-board 300. A command transmission means 207 is included. The payout control command communication means 206 transmits a payout command instructing payout of the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning hole based on the judgment of the entering ball into each winning hole by the entering ball judging means 201 . Sends a command that indicates the status of an error that occurred in The sub-control command transmitting means 207 transmits the determination result of the lottery corresponding to the symbol variation to the effect determining means 303 together with the symbol variation control command when starting the symbol variation.

The sub-control command transmitting means 207 varies at the timing when the first special figure control means 251 and the second special figure control means 252 start and stop the variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. A start command and a variation stop command are transmitted to the effect determination means 303 (sub-main). When transmitting the variation start command, the value indicating each of the success/failure determination result, the stop pattern, and the variation pattern determined or determined as this determination, and the value indicating whether it is the first success/failure lottery or the second success/failure lottery It is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 together with the variation start command. When the fluctuation stop command is transmitted, the value indicating the stop pattern is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the fluctuation stop command. In addition, the effect determination means 303 (sub-main) transmits a variation start command, a change stop command, etc. to the effect control means 304 in order to control the variable display of the decorative symbols by the effect control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the variable display by the main display control means 250 and the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) are synchronized and interlocking is maintained. Also, the sub-control command transmitting means 207 transmits the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determining means 235 to the effect determining means 303 . After the preliminary determination result is temporarily stored in the transmission buffer, regardless of whether or not the pattern variation display corresponding to the lottery starts immediately, the winning opening corresponding to the preliminary determination result (first start opening 11, second start opening It is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 together with the type information of the port 12), the information of the number of reservations, the game state, etc., and is erased from the transmission buffer or overwritten later. As a result, on the side of the sub-board 300, it is possible to speculatively recognize the winning result before the turn to start pattern variation, based on the received preliminary determination result. Processing based on the preliminary determination information performed by the sub-board 300 will be described later. Sub control command transmitting means 207 is set by special game control means 260 information on the special game, information on the small winning game by the small winning game control means 265, information on the lottery result by the general pattern lottery means 213, setting change means 286 setting value information of the game setting is transmitted to the sub-board 300 . Further, the sub-control command transmitting means 207 transmits various kinds of control in the main board 200 or to the main board 200, such as information on initial processing by the main initial process executing means 280 and the main error detecting means 284, information on errors, and the like. information about various signals and the like to be sent to the sub-board 300 as appropriate.

FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the sub-board. The sub board 300 includes pattern mode determination means 301, pattern storage means 302, effect determination means 303, effect control means 304, timer means 307, effect setting means 308, sub initial process execution means 360, sub power interruption process execution means 362, A sub-error detecting means 364 , a command receiving means 370 , and a sub-side prior determination means 371 are provided.

The pattern storage means 302 holds a plurality of production patterns in which the content of the production image to be displayed on the production display device 60 and the display process thereof are determined when the decorative pattern 61 is changed. The performance patterns include a plurality of variable performance patterns in which the variation process from start to stop of variation in the variable display of the decorative pattern 61 and the performance process are determined, and the degree of expectation for the big win displayed separately from the variable display of the decorative pattern. and a plurality of forewarning effect patterns that foretell the height of the variable display before stopping.

The command receiving means 370 receives various commands transmitted from the command communication means 205 , and the sub-side preliminary determination means 371 holds the preliminary determination results transmitted from the command communication means 205 . The effect determination means 303 includes normal effect determination means 373 and prefetch effect determination means 374 . The normal effect determination means 373 displays on the effect display device 60 by the effect control means 304 according to the information of the determination result of the first lottery or the determination result of the second lottery transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the speaker 108, decides the content of the presentation to be output to the decoration lamp 111 or the like. The effect determination means 303 determines the content of effect according to the set value of the game setting transmitted from the command communication means 205 . The look-ahead effect determination means 374 determines the effect content to be displayed on the effect display device 60 by the effect control means 304 and output to the speaker 108, the decoration lamp 111, etc., according to the preliminary determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205. . The normal effect determination means 373 is determined by the first variation pattern determination means 231 or the second variation pattern determination means 232, and is selected from among a plurality of variation effect patterns corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern transmitted from the command communication means 205. Either one is selected and read out from the pattern storage means 302 . The normal effect determination means 373 sends the information of the read variable effect pattern to the effect control means 304 . The normal effect determining means 373 holds a pattern table to be referred to in order to select a variable effect pattern. In addition, there may be a case where the variable effect pattern is determined by the normal effect determination means 373 with reference to the preliminary determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the contents of the look-ahead effect determined by the look-ahead effect determination means 374 are varied. A production pattern may be determined. The look-ahead effect determination means 374 more accurately specifies the result of this determination based on the result of prior determination from the command communication means 205, the result of prior determination in the past held in the sub-board 300, the game state information, and the like. Based on the results obtained, whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect before this determination and the execution details are determined. Specifically, the look-ahead effect determination means 374 determines whether the current game state is in the probability variation game, and then shifts to the normal game state based on the prior determination result prior to the prior determination result received this time. determine whether or not to Based on the judgment result, it identifies the result of this judgment related to the pre-judgment result received this time, the selected variation pattern, etc., and determines whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect and the execution content of the pre-reading effect based on the specific result. . Since the normal effect determining means 373 and the look-ahead effect determining means 374 cooperate in many parts of the effect determining means 303, the effect determining means 303 will be described as including both, except for a particularly necessary part.

In each variation performance pattern, a variation time is set for each pattern as a termination condition of the pattern variation, and the pattern variation is stopped when the variation time elapses. The effect determination means 303 selects a variable effect pattern of the effect image having the same variable time according to the change pattern of the special symbol.

The symbol mode determining means 301 determines the combination and arrangement of the stationary symbols of the decorative symbols 61 based on the determination result of the lottery by the first lottery means 211 or the second lottery means 212, the stop symbol of the special symbol, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the decoration. It is determined according to the variation performance pattern of the design. The symbol mode determination means 301 transmits information indicating the determined combination of stop symbols to the effect control means 304 . The symbol mode determination means 301 holds a symbol range table to be referred to in order to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol.

The stop pattern of the decorative pattern 61 is formed as a combination of three patterns. For example, when the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means 221 and the second success/failure determination means 222 indicates a transition to a 4R big hit or a 16R big hit special game. A specific combination, for example, a combination of three symbols such as "777" and "111" is selected. A specific combination such as "357" is also selected when the success/failure determination result is a 2R big hit or a small hit, but these specific combinations are not necessarily combinations of three symbols. It doesn't have to be. If the success/failure judgment result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, it is a combination such as "312" or "946" where the three symbols are not aligned, and it is a specific combination selected at the time of a 2R big hit or a small hit. Non-applicable combinations are selected. If the success/failure judgment result is not a 4R or 16R big hit, and if a variation pattern that indicates an outlier with a reach is selected, a combination that does not have a single pattern such as "191" or "727" to select.

The variation display pattern of the decorative symbols defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbols, that is, the performance process from the start of the variation of the decorative symbols to the stop of the variation. The variable effect patterns include a pattern for displaying a normal winning pattern, a pattern for displaying a winning pattern after a ready-to-win state in which one more pattern is aligned, and a winning pattern after a ready-to-win state. Contains patterns for when In particular, the pattern when passing through the reach state includes patterns with various long and short fluctuation times. In each variation performance pattern, a variation time is set for each pattern as a termination condition of the pattern variation, and the pattern variation is stopped when the variation time elapses. A performance determining means 303 selects a variation performance pattern of decorative symbols having the same variation time as the special symbols according to the variation pattern of the special symbols.

In the time saving state, if the variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern determination means 231 or the second variation pattern determination means 232 is a pattern for time reduction, the effect determination means 3
03 selects a variable performance pattern in which performance contents for time saving are determined. The effect content for time saving is an effect in which a background image or sound is output to give the impression that the player is in an advantageous state due to the time saving or probability change.

The advance notice effect pattern is a effect pattern for temporarily displaying a specific character or motif image, animation, video, or the like, a effect pattern for moving a character, or a effect pattern for outputting a specific sound. The performance by the foretelling performance pattern is executed in parallel with the pattern variation, and preliminarily suggests that the degree of expectation that the pattern variation is stopped in a jackpot mode is high. For example, there is a normal announcement effect in which only one image of a character is displayed on the screen, and a group announcement effect in which a group of characters are displayed so as to pass from one end of the screen to the other. In addition, a step-up notice performance is further included in which the display process of the notice performance is divided into a plurality of stages, the number of stages to be displayed is variable, and the greater the number of stages, the higher the expectation for the big win.

The notice effect pattern includes a pattern (post-read notice) for predicting the final stop state of the pattern by executing the effect at the timing after the display mode of the decorative pattern 61 becomes the ready-to-win state, and the decorative pattern 61. There is also a pattern (notice before reach) that foretells at the same time that the production will be executed at a timing that is not always stopped and the reach state will be reached.

The performance determining means 303 determines whether or not to display the preliminary performance on the performance display device 60 according to the determination result of the success or failure lottery or the preliminary determination result by a predetermined preliminary lottery, sets the preliminary performance, and should display it. To decide a notice performance pattern. A performance determining means 303 holds a preliminary announcement determination table to be referred to for determining whether or not to display the preliminary performance, and a preliminary announcement type table to be referred to when selecting the kind of the preliminary performance pattern. The advance notice determination table is set so that different columns are referred to according to the judgment result of the lottery or the result of prior judgment, and the advance notice effect is displayed at a higher probability when the lottery is successful than when the lottery is lost. As described above, the correspondence relation between the determination result of the win/fail lottery and whether or not to display the notice effect is determined. As a result, the display of the advance notice effect itself can suggest a high degree of expectation for the big win.

The effect control means 304 causes the effect display device 60 to variably display the effect image including the decorative pattern 61 according to the selected variable effect pattern data. The production control means 304 sets the reception of the command to start the variation of the decorative pattern 61 as a condition for starting the variable display of the new decorative pattern. When the performance determining means 303 determines to display the preliminary performance, the performance control means 304 displays the preliminary performance in accordance with the selected preliminary performance pattern on the performance display device 60 in a form superimposed on the performance of the symbol variation. Let

A performance control means 304 reserves the start of the pattern variation display corresponding to the first win/fail lottery when the win/fail lottery value of the second win/fail lottery is stored, and whether the win/fail lottery value of the first win/fail lottery is stored. The pattern variation display corresponding to the second win/fail lottery is started regardless of whether or not. Thus, when the lottery values are reserved for both the first win/fail lottery and the second win/fail lottery, the lottery value held for the second win/fail lottery is preferentially read out and the variation of the decorative pattern is displayed. . In such a case, the lottery value withheld in the first lottery is not read out until the number of pending lotteries in the second lottery becomes 0, and the decorative design does not start to change. In this manner, the effect control means 304 causes the effect display device 60 to display the symbol variation effect including the variable display of the decorative symbol 61. - 特許庁

The effect control means 304 further controls the lighting and extinguishing of the decorative lamp 111 and the operation of the movable accessory 66 . The effect control means 304 has effect display control means 305 , sound control means 306 and lamp control means 309 . Effect display control means 305 controls display on the effect display device 60 , and audio control means 306 controls audio output from the speaker 108 . The lamp control means 309 controls lighting and extinguishing of the decoration lamp 111 .

During the variation of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52, the effect display device 60 needs to display an image indicating that the symbol is varying. Normally, a normal-sized decorative pattern 61 having a certain size is variably displayed, but other than the variation of the decorative pattern 61, other than the variation of the decorative pattern 61, is regarded as the main performance content in a manner that hinders the visibility of the variable display of the normal-sized decorative pattern 61.例文帳に追加A special effect may be displayed. In this case, the player is presented with the fact that the pattern is fluctuating by variably displaying the substitute pattern, which is a decorative pattern smaller in size than the normal-sized decorative pattern. Hereinafter, when simply referred to as a decorative pattern, it means a normal-sized decorative pattern, but when distinguishing from an alternative pattern, a normal-sized decorative pattern is also called a "normal decorative pattern" or a "main decorative pattern".

The alternative pattern is displayed while the visibility of the normal decorative pattern is obstructed, for example, while the normal decorative pattern is hidden. The alternative pattern is a form of decorative pattern for directing the result of the judgment result, and has a display form simplified (in other words, simplified, simplified) than the normal decorative pattern, and the normal decorative pattern It is displayed in a more simplified variation process than The alternative pattern has an external display form corresponding to the portion indicating the pattern type of the normal decorative pattern, for example, has a display form representing numbers, letters, and symbols indicating the pattern type. In addition, the alternative pattern is variably displayed in an area narrower than the area where the decorative design is variably displayed. Typically, it is located at a position where it is difficult for elements other than the design to interfere with the main effect, such as a corner of the screen of the effect display device 60. Fluctuating display. The alternative pattern is usually displayed relatively smaller than the decorative pattern, but has a display form in which at least the type of pattern can be identified in appearance. The alternative pattern may be a reduced version of the normal decorative pattern, or may be the same as the normal decorative pattern except for the size.

A plurality of substitute patterns displayed in place of a plurality of normal decorative patterns suggest a high degree of expectation that the result of the winning lottery will be in an advantageous state for the player due to the combination of stop modes at the end of variation. For example, a plurality of alternative symbols suggest that the likelihood of a big win in the variation is high when two of the three alternative symbols are in a ready-to-win state. In addition, the left and right symbols in the reach state are “3” and “7”, which indicate that the expectations are relatively high, and the expectations are “1” and “2”. The degree of expectation of the reach state may be suggested by becoming a pattern of a type that suggests a relatively low degree. It should be noted that the alternative pattern does not appear to be in a definite stop state, but is in a temporary stop state in which slight shaking is maintained. After the temporary stop of the alternative symbol, the normal decorative symbol may be displayed in place of the alternative symbol, and the normal decorative symbol may be displayed in the fixed stop state. Further, the display periods may overlap instead of exclusively displaying the normal decorative pattern and the alternative pattern. Furthermore, at the time of a predetermined performance in which the visibility of the normal decorative pattern is obstructed, the variable display of the normal decorative pattern may be continued and the variation of the alternative pattern may be displayed. Unlike the alternative design, the special design is fluctuating in a predetermined area of the effect display device 60 while the first special design 51 and the second special design 52 are changing, with an image that is about the same as or smaller than the alternative design. A simple symbol suggesting that there is something may be variably displayed. The simple design may consist of a variable display of a combination of three patterns in the same way as the normal decorative design, or may consist of a variable display of a single design, or may be a simple symbol ("O", "X", etc.). may be configured in such a manner that they are sequentially switched. Simple patterns are not related to the variable display mode of normal decorative patterns and alternative patterns, and display constant fluctuations from the start of fluctuation of special patterns to the end of fluctuation. may be displayed as It should be noted that the simple symbols may be changed as long as the indication that the special symbols are being changed and the results of the special symbols are reported at least, and the simple symbols may be displayed in a combination of two symbols or the like. In addition, the simple design may also be called "sub-decorative design", "sub-design", "mini-decorative design", "mini-design", and the like. Aside from the effect display device 60, variable display of a decorative pattern called a fourth pattern that shows a display equivalent to the simple pattern by means of a light emitting mode such as an LED may be used. The fourth symbol is used to indicate the progress of the game (display during variation of special symbols, display of results) in the event that a problem occurs in the effect display device 60 or the like. As an example of the display mode of the fourth pattern, the LED lights up in sequence as "white", "blue", "green", "yellow", "orange", and "red" (blinking including extinguishing is also possible). Alternatively, the variable display may be suggested by blinking in a certain single color according to the type of special pattern, and the luminescent color at the time of stop display may suggest the type of loss or big win.

The clock means 307 is a clock circuit that outputs time information used for games. The clock means 307 is a timer circuit that measures the time from power-on with a counter and outputs it as time information. However, a real-time clock circuit that incorporates a battery and can continue to measure the date and time by the battery even when the power of the pachinko game machine 100 is turned off or during a power outage may be used. In the case of a real-time clock circuit, there is the possibility that slight differences may occur in the time of each game machine due to individual differences or time lags. is unlikely to occur.

The effect determining means 303 executes a synchronized effect that starts at a predetermined timing triggered by the time information output by the clock means 307 indicating a predetermined time. The synchronization effect is an effect displayed on the effect display device 60 in a synchronization effect period which is substantially asynchronous with the fluctuation period of the pattern fluctuation and the game state. The synchronization performance period lasts for several minutes, its length is longer than one symbol variation time, and can include a plurality of symbol variation periods. The effect pattern of the synchronizing effect is stored in the pattern storage means 302, and reproduction of a predetermined music piece and video is determined in the effect pattern. A plurality of types of performance patterns for the synchronized performance are prepared, and different types of performance patterns can be selected depending on the date and time such as the month, date, day of the week, and time.

Synchronization performance is executed regardless of whether it is during a normal game or during a special game. Here, "during a normal game" includes displaying a so-called standby demo screen. That is, the "during normal game" includes (1) "normal game during variable display" in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and (2) "normal game during variable stop" in which symbols are not displayed in variable display and the standby demo screen is not displayed. , and (3) ``Normal game during display of standby demo screen'' in which the standby demo screen is being displayed instead of the variable display of symbols. The tuning effect can be executed during any of the periods (1) to (3), but in the case of (2) and (3), the output mode for control such as volume reduction and brightness reduction in the tuning effect is (1). can be different from when Also, while the standby demo screen is being displayed, the player can input information related to the mobile cooperation system, which will be described later, by operating the effect button 109 or the cross key 110, and when the operation input is received, the video and audio of the synchronization effect are output. It is suppressed, and screen display such as effect customization by the mobile cooperation system is given priority.

The synchronization effect is, for example, a performance in which a predetermined musical piece or video is reproduced at a predetermined time (referred to as "synchronization effect start time"). The time that triggers the reproduction of the synchronization effect may be the time that arrives after a predetermined time interval from when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, or the time on the hour or half past the hour based on the standard time. may be Alternatively, times may be set that may vary depending on the date or day of the week, not at regular intervals such as "every hour", but at different intervals such as one hour later, then three hours later, and so on. Intervals may vary by date or day of the week. It may be a variable setting in which the time can be designated by a game clerk for each game parlor. However, it is set in advance so that the same synchronization effect is executed at least at the same time among a plurality of machines of the same model installed in the same game parlor. For example, in the case of a specification that is triggered by the arrival of a predetermined time interval after the power is turned on, a plurality of machines are powered on at the same time in an amusement arcade. As a result, when the predetermined time is reached, the same synchronizing effect is executed on the plurality of game machines all at once. As a result, the performance is displayed at the same time as if it were synchronized on multiple devices, and the same music and images are played at the same time, creating a synergistic effect with a sense of realism, as if a live performance or movie was being shown on the spot. A dramatic effect is obtained.

The function of synchronized performance is similarly built in other game machines of the same model, and a plurality of game machines on the same game island are simultaneously turned on by the game clerk every day. Then, all of the plurality of game machines that are powered on at the same time reach the synchronization performance start time almost at the same time, so that the synchronization performance can be executed all at once. This is called multi-unit synchronous production. In that case, not only will the video display be synchronized across multiple units, but the output of sound effects and background music will also be synchronized across multiple units. increase.

The effect setting means 308 stores the game history of the player. The game history includes the history of game results and the history of performance results. The history of the game result is the result of the game that leads to the number of balls that the player can obtain as a result of the game, such as the number of hit balls, the number of prize balls, the number of big hits, the number of probability variations, and the number of time reductions. Unlike game profits, the history of performance results is recorded in order to obtain benefits such as the right to change the content and type of performance and the right to make it easier for specific types of performance to appear. It is information such as the score of For example, in order to convert the number of appearances of a predetermined effect, the result of a mini game, etc. into a score and give it to the player, encoded information indicating the score and game history, such as a two-dimensional code, is displayed on the screen. When the player reads and decodes the two-dimensional code with the camera of his/her mobile terminal, the score and game history information obtained by the decoding are stored in the player's mobile terminal. A cooperation system between the gaming machine and the mobile terminal of the player via the two-dimensional code will be described later. It should be noted that the score here is necessary to expand the range of production customization described later, and the score reaches a predetermined cumulative value (for example, reaching 1000 points, every 100 points, etc.). With this as an opportunity, the number of customizable items increases.

The effect setting means 308 stores settings for selecting one of a plurality of types of effect content options as effect customization based on the player's selection instruction and game history. For example, a pattern storage means 302 prepares a plurality of types of performance patterns with different displayed motifs, characters and music as performance patterns to be displayed during a special game, and the player is allowed to select which performance to display. It is assumed that Alternatively, a plurality of kinds of motifs or character patterns are prepared in a pattern storage means 302 as designs of patterns included in decorative patterns to be varied, and the player is allowed to select which pattern to display. In these cases, when the player operates the production button 109 or the cross key 110 while the standby demo screen is displayed, and the production pattern is selected through the operation, the production setting means 308 selects the contents of the selection. Remember. The effect determination means 303 selects the type of effect pattern during the special game according to the setting stored by the effect setting means 308. - 特許庁

The sub-initial processing executing means 360 executes control start processing of the sub-board 300 when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on or when the power is restored. The sub-power-off process execution means 362 executes an abnormality handling process such as a power-off process in the sub board 300 when a power failure such as a power failure occurs. The sub-error detection means 364 executes abnormality detection processing in the sub-board 300 . When the sub-error detecting means 364 detects the power interruption, the sub power-off processing execution means 362 backs up the data in the RAM to the backup RAM as the power interruption processing.

FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing an outline of the mobile cooperation system. As a premise of the mobile cooperation system, the player is registered as a user by setting an account and a password on the game history server 358 provided with a dedicated site on the mobile terminal 354 in advance. When the player presses the performance button 109 at the start of the game, the performance display control means 305 causes the screen of the performance display device 60 to display the two-dimensional code 350 encoded with the address of the dedicated site of the game history server 358, The player is made to read it with the camera of the mobile terminal and access the dedicated site of the game history server 358. - 特許庁Character information (also referred to as "password information") in which the player's identification information and performance score history are coded from the dedicated site is transmitted to the mobile terminal and displayed on the screen of the mobile terminal. The effect display control means 305 causes the effect display device 60 to display the input screen of the password information, and allows the player to input the password information through button operation such as the cross key 110 . The performance setting means 308 decrypts the entered password information and registers it as the identification information of the player and the performance score history, so that the player's previous game contents and performance score state can be handed over. The input of this password information serves as an instruction to start recording the game history of the player and an instruction to start effect customization for selecting various effect elements. Thereafter, in the pachinko game machine 100, with the progress of the game and the performance, the performance setting means 308 adds the score given to the player as a profit in the performance at any time and accumulates it as a performance score history, and the player , it is possible to carry out production customization at any time and select and set favorite elements as various production elements. Scoring in performance is basically added for each pattern variation, and a higher score is given to a performance type with a higher degree of expectation for shift to a special game, and a higher score is given when shifting to a special game.

As effect customization, the player utilizes a part of the cumulatively acquired points, and according to the number of points used, colors, backgrounds, shapes, characters, etc. that constitute the content of the effect displayed on the effect display device 60 are changed. You can change production elements such as music to your favorite type. The effect setting means 308 receives an instruction to change the effect element through button operation by the player, and changes various effect elements according to the instruction. Multiple types of items are prepared for each customizable production element, and a different value is set as the number of points required for each item. Therefore, when the accumulated score reaches a predetermined value, the number of customizable items increases, or a chance is given to increase the customizable items. When a player operates a button to instruct the end of a game or performance customization, a performance setting means 308 generates a two-dimensional code 350 that encodes information such as performance benefits and performance score history, and controls the performance display. Means 305 displays on effect display device 60 . The player reads the two-dimensional code 350 with the camera of his/her mobile terminal, and decodes the read two-dimensional code 352 to acquire information and store it in the mobile terminal 354 . Further, the information is transmitted from the portable terminal 354 to a game history server 358 having a dedicated site via the network 356, and is managed in association with its own account information. In this way, information such as performance benefits and performance score history is transmitted to the mobile terminal 354 via transmission means such as display and reading of the two-dimensional code 350, and is managed by the game history server 358. The contents of the game and production can be taken over in the next game. In addition, by continuing the game for a long time, the number of symbol changes and the number of presentations increase, so that points can be obtained.

FIG. 13 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the main board 200 and the sub board 300. As shown in FIG. The main substrate 200 includes electronic components such as a main CPU 290, a main RAM 291, a main ROM 292, and the like. The main ROM 292 stores in advance a main control program and data for controlling game operations in general. A main control program or data is read from the main ROM 292 into the main RAM 291 and the main control program is executed by the main CPU 290 . Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus and a data bus (not shown). A ball entry signal from each ball entrance and a payout signal from the payout control board 155 are acquired by the main CPU 290 via various interfaces (not shown). The main CPU 290 drives and controls external devices such as winning opening solenoids, the first special symbol display section 41 and the second special symbol display section 42 by various drive circuits (not shown). Also, commands necessary for effect control are transmitted from the main CPU 290 to the sub-board 300 together with information such as the result of the lottery, the determination result of the symbol, the determination result of the variation pattern, and the like. A signal is transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 by one-way communication.

The command data transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 has a 2-byte configuration consisting of a combination of 1-byte command type data called MODE data and 1-byte command content data called EVENT data. The main board 200 can send one command by associating the command type data and the command content data and transmitting them to the sub board 300 . The instruction type data is a bit string indicating the instruction type, and a unique type code is assigned in advance to each instruction type at the development stage. The instruction content data is a bit string indicating the content of the instruction. The most significant bit of instruction type data and instruction content data is an identification bit that indicates whether it is instruction type data or instruction content data. When the bit is 0, it indicates that it is instruction content data.

Communication from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 requires two transmissions of 1 byte each to transmit 2-byte command data because of the specification of transmitting 1-byte data per data transmission. . MODE data, which is the upper byte, is transmitted in the first communication, and EVENT data, which is the lower byte, is transmitted in the second communication. Considering the possibility of communication failure due to the influence of noise, etc., the main circuit board 200 continuously transmits the same data, and when the sub circuit board 300 reads the same data twice in succession, the completion of transmission and reception of the data is determined. . The main board 200 repeatedly transmits the same data until it is read twice in succession, and transmits it up to five times.

The sub-board 300 includes electronic components such as a sub-CPU 310, sub-RAM 311, sub-ROM 312, effect control device 313, and the like. The sub ROM 312 is one of data storage means for holding a sub control program including effect pattern data defining a effect process and display pattern data defining a effect display process. A sub-control program including effect pattern data, display pattern data, and sound pattern data is read from the sub-ROM 312 into the sub-RAM 311, and effect control by the sub-control program is executed by the sub CPU 310. FIG. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus and a data bus (not shown). A signal from an external device such as the effect button 109 is acquired by the sub CPU 310 via various interfaces (not shown). The sub CPU 310 drives external devices such as the effect display device 60, the speaker 108, the decorative lamp 111, and the movable accessory 66 by the effect control device 313 and various drive circuits and control circuits (not shown) according to the effect pattern data, and outputs the display. , voice output, lighting of lamps, and performances by character actions. Sub CPU 310 transmits display pattern data and sound pattern data to effect control device 313 . In this embodiment, an example in which the sub-board 300 includes the effect control device 313 will be described, but the sub-board 300 and the effect control device 313 do not need to be integrated as a board, but are separated and connected to each other. may be formed as a separate substrate with the

FIG. 14 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the effect control device 313. As shown in FIG. The effect control device 313 includes a control CPU 320 , a control RAM 322 , a data ROM 324 , a display control circuit 326 and an audio control circuit 314 . The data ROM 324 is one of data storage means for holding material data such as effect image data and motion data used for effect display and audio data used for audio output in a data-compressed state. The effect image data is an image that is used for variable display and effect display as a effect object that indicates the determination result of the winning lottery. It is a material image such as a moving image to be used. The motion data is data that defines the action when adding a dramatic action to an image used for various effects at a predetermined timing. The audio data is audio data such as music, background sounds, sound effects, and characters' words that are output during production.

Based on the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310, the effect image data and motion data designated by the display pattern data are read from the data ROM 324 to the control RAM 322, and the effect display using the effect image data and motion data. is executed by the control CPU 320 . As a result, the control CPU 320 transmits commands relating to effect display, effect image data, and motion data to the display control circuit 326, and the display control circuit 326 performs display control. Similarly, the control CPU 320 transmits commands and audio data relating to audio output to the audio control circuit 314, and the audio control circuit 314 performs audio output control.

The display control circuit 326 includes a decoder 332 , a drawing memory 334 , a drawing circuit 336 , a frame buffer 338 and a display circuit 340 , each connected via a bus 330 . For convenience, the bus 330 in this figure generically represents buses such as a system bus, a data bus, and an address bus.

Effect image data and motion data sent from the control CPU 320 are stored in the drawing memory 334 , and compressed data among these data is decoded by the decoder 332 . The drawing memory 334 is a VRAM (VideoRAM) used as a work area when the decoder 332 decodes effect image data and motion data, and used as a work area when the drawing circuit 336 executes drawing processing and image processing. ).

The drawing circuit 336 uses the data stored in the drawing memory 334 to sequentially execute the commands sent from the control CPU 320 to generate a display image. 338. The frame buffer 338 is a VRAM as a buffer memory for temporarily storing frames of moving images to be output to the effect display device 60 .

The display circuit 340 outputs the display images stored in the frame buffer 338 to the effect display device 60 in the form of video signals in the order in which they are stored. The frame buffer 338 has a memory area for two frames, for example. Store in the memory area for one more frame.

The data ROM 324 holds “detailed display pattern data” that defines the display control process performed by the display control circuit 326 . At this time, the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310 can be referred to as "general display pattern data" that defines the outline of the effect display process. For example, in the general display pattern data, a rough flow of a series of effect display processes is defined, such as the start and stop timing of variation of decorative patterns, the order of reproduction of a plurality of moving images, and the timing of start and stop of reproduction. . On the other hand, detailed display pattern data includes detailed display control such as the display order of sprite images for realizing variable display of decorative patterns, and the display processing order for each frame to display moving images based on motion data. A process is defined.

When performing display control based on the "general display pattern data" sent from the sub CPU 310, the effect control device 313 reads the "detailed display pattern data" necessary for the process from the data ROM 324, and uses both display pattern data. display processing. Therefore, it can be said that the effect control device 313 executes the display control process based on the display pattern data including the "general display pattern data" and the "detailed display pattern data". Therefore, in this specification, unless explicitly mentioned, the "general display pattern data" stored in the sub ROM 312 and the "detailed display pattern data" stored in the data ROM 324 are not distinguished from each other. ”. For example, when the effect control means performs specific processing based on the display pattern data held in the data storage means, the display pattern data includes "general display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data". . In the modified example, even if the display pattern data is not divided into the "general display pattern data" and the "detailed display pattern data", and the display pattern data serving as both is held in the sub ROM 312 or the data ROM 324, good.

In this embodiment, as the hardware configuration of the effect control device 313, a configuration including a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324 and a display control circuit 326 is shown. In a modification, control CPU 320, control RAM 322, data ROM 324, and display control circuit 326 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. Also, the processing that is supposed to be executed by the display control circuit 326 may be executed by the control CPU 320 , the control RAM 322 or the data ROM 324 . For example, the control CPU 320 included in the effect control device 313 may execute processing that is supposed to be performed by the decoder 332 , the drawing circuit 336 and the display circuit 340 included in the display control circuit 326 . Further, the control RAM 322 included in the effect control device 313 may also function as the drawing memory 334 and the frame buffer 338 . In addition, the hardware configuration may not include the display control circuit 326 in the effect control device 313, in this case, the processing to be executed by the display control circuit 326 is executed by the control CPU320, the control RAM322 or the data ROM324 may be

Further, in this embodiment, as the hardware configuration of the sub-board 300, a configuration including a production control device 313 in addition to the sub-CPU 310, sub-RAM 311 and sub-ROM 312 is shown. In a modification, the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311, the ROM 312 and the effect control device 313 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. Further, the processing that is executed by the effect control device 313 may be executed by the sub CPU310, the sub RAM311 or the sub ROM312. For example, the sub CPU 310 may execute the processing of the control CPU 320 , the sub RAM 311 may also function as the control RAM 322 , and the sub ROM 312 may function as the data ROM 324 . In addition, the sub-board 300 may have a hardware configuration in which the effect control device 313 is not included. may

FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing control start processing of the main board 200 in the pachinko game machine. This control start process is executed by the main initial process executing means 280 , but hereafter it will be described as being executed by the main CPU 290 functioning as the main initial process executing means 280 . When the power switch 150 is turned on, the main CPU 290 sets a stack pointer (S100), permits access to the main RAM 291 (S102), and executes initial settings related to hardware such as setting internal registers of the main CPU 290. (S104).

The main CPU 290 checks the operating state of the setting key, and if the setting key is ON (Y in S105), checks the operating state of the RAM clear switch. If the RAM clear switch is ON (Y of S122), setting change processing is executed (S124). On the other hand, if RAM clear is OFF (N of S122), setting confirmation processing is executed (S126). In S105, if the setting key is in the OFF state (N in S105), the processing of S122 to S126 is skipped.

Subsequently, according to the operating state of the RAM clear switch, the value of the power-off information flag, and the state of data stored in the main RAM 291, power-off recovery processing or initialization processing of the main RAM 291 is executed. Specifically, when the RAM clear switch is not turned on and both the value of the power interruption information flag and the data stored in the main RAM 291 are normal, the power interruption recovery process is executed. do. In other cases, that is, when the RAM clear switch is turned on or even when the RAM clear switch is not turned on, either the power interruption information flag or the data stored in the main RAM 291 is normal. If not, initialization processing of the main RAM 291 is executed.

The main CPU 290 confirms the operating state of the RAM clear switch, and when the RAM clear switch is turned on (Y in S106), initializes the main RAM 291 (S116). If the RAM clear switch has not been turned on (N of S106), the main CPU 290 confirms the value of the power-off information flag (S108). If the value of the power-off information flag does not match the power-off normal data (N of S108), the main RAM 291 is initialized (S116). If the value of the power-off information flag matches the power-off normal data (Y of S108), the data stored in the main RAM 291 is checked (S110). As will be described later, if the processing was completed normally when the power was turned off last time, the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is stored in the main RAM 291, so the main CPU 290 uses the checksum to The data in the main RAM 291 are inspected. If the data stored in the main RAM 291 are not normal (N of S112), the data in the main RAM 291 are initialized (S116). If the data stored in the main RAM is normal (Y of S112), a process for returning to the state before the power was turned off is executed (S114).

In the power-off recovery process (S114), the power-on normal data indicating that the power was turned on normally is stored in the power-off information flag, and the initialization of various errors and the initial setting of communication with the payout control board 155 are executed. do. Next, it clears the command requests that have not been sent before the power is turned off, and requests the command transmission of various information indicating the game state. Subsequently, an effect command corresponding to the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is requested. Subsequently, the open/closed states of the second starting port 12 and the big prize winning port 20 are restored to the states before the power was turned off. Subsequently, a process for notifying the operating state of the special symbol probability variation function is executed.

In the RAM initialization process (S116), power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag, the entire area of the main RAM 291 is cleared to 0, and the initialization of the main RAM 291 and the initialization of the effect display are executed. Note that in the initialization process of S116, the setting values stored in the setting memory of the setting change device 170 are not cleared, and the setting values set in the setting change process of S124 are held as they are.

When the power-off recovery process (S114) or RAM initialization process (S116) is completed, a count value is set to start an interrupt process, which will be described later, and an interrupt timer is started (S118). As a result, a timer interrupt occurs at predetermined time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) thereafter, and interrupt processing, which will be described later, is executed. Subsequently, the main CPU 290 executes main processing for managing the gaming machine (S120).

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting change process of S124 in FIG. The value of the setting memory in which the setting value of the game setting should be stored is confirmed, and if the setting memory value is not normal (N of S132), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S134). When "1" to "6" are used as setting value data, "1" is set as the initial value, and when "0" to "5" are used as setting value data, "0" is set as the initial value. If the setting memory value is normal (Y of S132), the process of S134 is skipped. Subsequently, the setting change state is entered (S136), and the setting values stored in the setting memory are displayed on the setting display section 173 (S138). If there is a change operation using the setting change button 172 (Y of S140), the setting values displayed on the setting display section 173 are updated, and the setting values stored in the setting memory are updated (S142). If there is no change operation (N of S140), the process of S142 is skipped. If the setting key remains ON (N of S144), the processing of S138 to S142 is repeated. If the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to its original state and turned OFF (Y in S144), the setting display section 173 is hidden so that the setting values cannot be visually recognized (S146), and the process returns.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting confirmation process of S126 in FIG. The value of the setting memory in which the setting value of the game setting should be stored is confirmed, and if the setting memory value is not normal (N of S152), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S154). If the setting memory value is normal (Y of S152), the process of S154 is skipped. The setting confirmation state is entered (S156), and the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display section 173 (S158). If the setting key remains ON (N of S160), the processing of S158 is repeated to continue displaying the setting value, and if the setting key is OFF (Y of S160), the setting display section 173 is hidden. to make the set value invisible (S162), and return.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing in detail the main processing of S120 in FIG. The main CPU 290 once prohibits timer interrupts (S200), starts the operation of the watchdog timer (S202), and monitors power interruption (S204). When a power supply voltage monitoring circuit (not shown) detects a drop in the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply substrate 158, the power supply voltage monitoring circuit inputs an unconditional interrupt request signal to the main CPU 290 to execute power-off memory. In the process, the power-off confirmation data is stored in the power-off confirmation flag. Therefore, the main CPU 290 monitors the value of the power-off confirmation flag (S204), and when the value of the power-off confirmation flag matches the power-off confirmation data (Y of S206), executes the power-off process. Therefore, the process proceeds to S212. When the value of the power interruption confirmation flag does not match the power interruption confirmation data (N of S206), in order to update the initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial random number per special symbol, and the soft initial random number per special symbol, An initial value random number update process is executed (S208), a timer interrupt is permitted (S210), and the process returns to S200. Thereafter, S200 to S210 are repeated. If a timer interrupt occurs while the timer interrupt is prohibited (S202-S208), the interrupt process, which will be described later, is executed after the timer interrupt is permitted in S210.

When power failure is detected in S206 (Y in S206), the main CPU 290 restarts the watchdog timer (S212) and confirms the contents of the power failure information flag (S214). If the content of the power-off information flag does not match the power-on normal data (N in S214), it is determined that the power-on data was not saved normally, and the power-off abnormal data is stored in the power-off information flag. (S216) and proceed to S222. If the content of the power-off information flag matches the power-on normal data (Y in S214), it is determined that the power-on data has been saved normally, and the power-off normal data is stored in the power off information flag. (S218). Subsequently, when the power is turned on next time, in order to check the backed-up data of the main RAM 291, the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is calculated and stored in the main RAM 291 (S220). Subsequently, access to the main RAM 291 is prohibited (S222), and the loop continues until the power is turned off. Note that the above power-off processing is executed by the main power-off processing executing means 282 realized by the main CPU 290 .

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing details of interrupt processing. When a timer interrupt occurs in the main process (S120), the main CPU 290 executes interrupt processing. First, an interrupt operating condition is set (S300), and the watchdog timer is restarted (S302). Subsequently, in order to manage the game machine, input processing (S304), various random number update processing (S306), initial value update type random number update processing (S308), initial value random number update processing (S310), timer subtraction processing (S312) , 2nd start port effective period setting process (S314), winning monitoring process (S316), prize ball control process (S318), normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320), normal symbol control process (S322), normal symbol fluctuation start Monitoring process (S324), starting opening monitoring control process (S326), special symbol control process (S328), special electric accessory control process (S330), large winning opening effective period setting process (S332), special symbol variation start monitoring control Processing (S334), Abnormality detection processing (S336), Ball passing time abnormality detection processing (S338), Game state display processing (S340), Handle state signal inspection processing (S342), LED output processing (S344), Launch control signal Output processing (S346), test signal output processing (S348), solenoid output processing (S350), production control command transmission processing (S352), external information output processing (S354) are executed in order, and the next timer interrupt is permitted. (S356) and return.

In the input process (S304), the data of the input port of the switch attached to the game board surface, disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, door / frame open signal, magnetic detection signal, radio wave detection signal, and touch state signal are monitored. , data indicating the input state is created and stored in the main RAM 291 . The data indicating this input state consists of level data (input port data at the time of the current interrupt), rising data or falling data (input port data at the time of the current interrupt, and input port data at the time of the previous interrupt). This is data indicating a switch for which switching is observed by comparing the data of the input port by exclusive OR).

In various random number update processes (S306), the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated. A normal symbol variation pattern random number is read from the main RAM 291, and if the value is less than a predetermined maximum value, the value is incremented and stored, and if the value is greater than or equal to the predetermined maximum value, 0 is stored. Also, the fluctuation pattern random number is read from the main RAM 291, and if the result of subtracting a predetermined value from the value is 0 or more, the subtraction result is stored, and if it is less than 0, a predetermined maximum value is stored. As a result, the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated each time the timer interrupt occurs.

In the initial value update type random number update process (S308), the random number per normal symbol, the random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated. The value of each random number, the maximum value, and the initial value are read out from the main RAM 291, and the value of the random number is incremented. If the incremented result exceeds the maximum value, the value of the random number is set to 0. If the incremented result matches the initial value, the initial value random number is read from the main RAM 291 to update the initial value. As a result, the random number per normal symbol, the random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated each time the timer interrupt occurs, and when the value of the random number returns to the initial value, that is, the range of the random number is completed. Then, a new initial value is set and a random number is generated.

In the initial value random number update process (S310), the initial value random number per normal symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are updated. An initial value random number is read from the initial value random number update table of the main RAM 291, and the value of the initial value random number is incremented. If the incremented result exceeds the upper limit, the value of the initial random number is set to zero. A similar process is executed in the initial value random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120).

In the timer subtraction process (S312), the 2-byte timer is updated. The values of the timers for various controls are read from the main RAM 291 according to the respective tables, and when the timer values are other than 0, the values are sequentially decremented and stored. If the timer value is 0, no timer update is performed.

In the second starting opening valid period setting process (S314), the valid period of the second starting opening 12 is set. In the second start port 12, there is an effective period during which a prize ball is paid out when a game ball enters and a lottery related to the second special symbol is executed, and a prize ball payout and a second special symbol are executed even if a game ball enters. An invalid period is set during which the lottery related to the symbol is not executed. As will be described later, in the starting opening monitoring control process (S326), the second starting opening winning monitoring process is not executed during the invalid period of the second starting opening 12, so the game ball enters the second starting opening 12. Even so, the payout of prize balls and the lottery related to the second special symbol are not executed. The same applies to the case where the valid period and the invalid period are set for the first starting opening 11, the big winning opening 20, the first working opening 31, the second working opening 32, the general winning opening 33, and the like. When the state of the normal symbol is "normal electric accessary product in operation", data indicating that the second starting port 12 is in the valid period is stored in the second starting port valid period flag. When the state of the normal pattern is not "ordinary electric accessary product in operation", if the value of the second start opening effective extension timer is not 0, the second start opening valid period flag indicates that the second start opening 12 is valid. If the value of the second starting port valid extension timer is 0, data indicating that the second starting port is in the invalid period is stored in the second starting port valid period flag.

In the prize winning monitoring process (S316), it is checked whether the game ball has passed through the switch. If so, update the win counter. It also requests the creation of a security output request to be output to the external information output terminal 160 and the transmission of a command.

In the prize ball control process (S318), monitoring of data reception from the payout control board 155, command transmission request to the payout control board 155, command transmission to the payout control board 155, and inspection of received data from the payout control board 155 are executed in order.

In the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320), the passage of the game ball through the first operation opening 31 and the second operation opening 32 is monitored, and it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first operation opening 31 or the second operation opening 32. When the number of reserved normal symbol fluctuations is less than the upper limit value of 4, the number of reserved normal symbols is updated, and a random number related to normal symbols is stored in the main RAM 291 .

In the normal symbol control process (S322), the state of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the normal symbol control is in progress, the process relating to the normal symbol display section 45 or the normal electric accessory 90 is executed. When the state of the normal design is "during normal design fluctuation", normal design fluctuation processing is executed, and when it is "normal design stop design display", normal design stop design display processing is executed, "normal electric If it is "in operation", the normal electric auditors operation process is executed, and if it is "demonstrating the end of normal electric auditors operation", the normal electric auditors product operation end demonstration process is executed. In the normal symbol fluctuation process, after the normal symbol fluctuation is performed, the fluctuation time is monitored, and when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is over, the fluctuation stop setting of the normal symbol is performed, and the state of the normal symbol is changed to "Normal". Set to "symbol stop symbol display". In the normal pattern stop pattern display process, the stop pattern display time of the normal pattern is monitored, and when it is determined that the stop pattern display time of the normal pattern is over, the operation end setting of the normal pattern corresponding to the result of the hit determination is executed. In the case of a hit, set the state of the normal pattern to "normal electric accessory in operation", save the operating state of the normal electric accessory opening extension function at the time of normal electric accessory operation start, and start normal electric accessory operation Execute the operation setting of the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 corresponding to the operating state of the normal electric accessory opening extension function at the time. In the case of loss, the normal design state is set to "normal design fluctuation standby". When it is determined that the winning number of the winning openings related to the normal electric accessories 90 has reached the maximum number of winnings by monitoring the winning of the winning openings related to the ordinary electric accessories 90 of the game ball in the normal electric accessories operating process. , executes the operation end setting of the normal electric accessory 90 and the setting of the second starting port effective extension time. When it is determined that the number of winning prizes of the winning openings related to the normal electric accessory 90 has not reached the maximum winning number, the opening/closing time of the entrance of the winning opening related to the normal electric accessory 90 is monitored, and the normal electric accessory 90 is monitored. When it is determined that the opening/closing of the entrance of the winning opening is completed, and the opening of the entrance of the series of normal electric accessories 90 is completed, the operation end setting of the normal electric accessories 90 and the second start opening valid Execute the extension time setting. When it is determined that the opening/closing time of the entrance of the winning opening related to the normal electric accessory 90 has not ended, the opening/closing setting of the opening/closing of the entrance of the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 is not performed. In the ordinary electric accessory operation end demonstration process, the operation end demonstration time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is monitored, and when it is determined that the operation end demonstration time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is over, the state of the normal symbol is changed to "normal symbol Set to “Waiting for fluctuation”.

In the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S324), the state of the normal symbol is monitored, and if it is "waiting for normal symbol variation" and the value of the number of normal symbol operation pending balls is other than 0, the normal symbol fluctuation is determined to start When it is determined to start the variation of the normal design, the number of normal design operation suspension balls is decremented, hit determination, determination of the stop design, setting of the variation pattern number of the normal design, and setting of the variation time of the normal design are executed. . After that, the state of the normal design is set to "during normal design fluctuation", and the area of the main RAM 291 used for normal design state setting, hit determination, and fluctuation pattern determination is cleared.

In the starting opening monitoring control process (S326), the first starting opening 11 winning and the second starting opening 12 winning of the game ball are monitored. If the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of balls with the operation pending of the first special symbol is less than 4, the built-in random number is acquired, and the value obtained by adding the value of the soft random number per special symbol to the acquired built-in random number, It is stored in the buffer as a special symbol per random number used in big hit determination. In addition, as the random number which relates to the special design, it acquires and remembers the design random number and the fluctuation pattern random number. When the reservation of the second special design is prioritized over the reservation of the first special design, only the renewal of the reservation related to the winning is executed. In addition to updating the pending status of the winning, the total pending number is updated and the winning order is stored. Subsequently, in order to request a notice effect command corresponding to the random number to be stored at the time of start-up winning, the state of the game machine is checked, and if it is determined that it is a command transmission period, a hit notice effect request, a winning pattern notice effect request, and a pattern notice Execute production requests in order. Here, (1) while waiting for a hit and while the probability variation function of the normal symbol is not operating, when storing the random number related to the first special symbol, (2) waiting for a hit and the normal symbol When the random number associated with the second special symbol is stored while the probability variation function is not in operation, or (3) when the random number associated with the second special symbol is stored during the big win or the small win. , is the command transmission period. Subsequently, a production command corresponding to the number of operation pending balls of the special symbol is requested. As a result, the sub-board 300 is notified that the number of activated balls with special symbols has been updated. As described above, in pre-reading, four sets of preliminary determination information (preliminary correctness determination information, preliminary pattern determination information, and preliminary pattern determination information) and the number of reserved balls are transmitted to the sub-board 300 . In the above example, the main CPU 290 controls the transmission of the command for the pre-determination process, but in another example, if there is a ball entering the starting hole, it is uniformly transmitted and can be read ahead. The sub-CPU 310 may make various judgments such as whether it is a period or not. Subsequently, the value of the second starting opening effective period flag is checked, and if the value of the second starting opening effective period flag is data indicating that the second starting opening 12 is valid, the first starting opening winning prize In the same way as in the case, the monitoring process of the second start opening winning is executed. When the value of the second starting opening effective period flag is data indicating that the second starting opening 12 is in the invalid period, the second starting opening winning a prize monitoring process is not executed. In addition, when it is confirmed that the game ball has won a prize when the number of reserved balls is 0, the number of reserved balls is temporarily changed from 0 to 1, and then the control processing related to the start of fluctuation, which will be described later, is executed. .

In the special symbol control process (S328), the hit waiting state is checked, and if the special electric accessary product is in operation, that is, during the big hit or the small hit, the special symbol control process is terminated. If the special electric accessory is not in operation, the state of the special symbol is inspected, and if "standby for special symbol variation", end the special symbol control general-purpose processing, and if "variation start", special symbol variation Start processing is executed, and if ``special symbol fluctuation is in progress'', special symbol variation in-process is performed, and if ``special symbol stop symbol display is in progress'', special symbol stop symbol display in-process is performed. In the special symbol variation start processing, the selection number of the special symbol variation pattern is acquired based on the variation pattern random number, the variation time corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern number is determined, and the sub board 300 starts the effect display. Request a command for additional pattern information, variation pattern, and character information, set the state of the special pattern to ``during special pattern variation'', and clear the variation pattern determination area used to determine the special pattern variation pattern with 0. . In the special symbol variation process, after the special symbol variation is performed, the variation time is monitored, and when it is determined that the special symbol variation time has ended, the special symbol variation stop setting is performed, and the special symbol state is changed to "special Set to "symbol stop symbol display". In a special pattern stop pattern display process, the stop pattern display time of the special pattern is monitored, and when it is determined that the stop pattern display time of the special pattern is over, the operation end setting of the special pattern corresponding to the result of hit determination is executed. In the case of a big hit, in order to end the operation of the special design, the state of the special design is set to "waiting for special design fluctuation", the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously, and the probability of special design The variable function, the variable time shortening function for special symbols, the probability variable function for normal symbols, the variable time shortening function for normal symbols, and the opening extension function for normal electric accessories are deactivated, and the state of the game machine is prepared for the opening of the big winning mouth. Set to medium, set the winning start demonstration display time, command request for winning start demonstration effect, and command request for firing position specification effect (command request to execute effect that suggests recommended firing position such as "right shot") to run. When the result of the hit determination is a small win, the end of the operation of the special symbol variation time shortening function and the normal symbol probability variation function is determined, the variation pattern selection state is updated, the game state command is requested, and the special symbol is requested. In order to end the operation of the special symbol, set the state of the special symbol to "waiting for special symbol fluctuation", set the state of the gaming machine during the small winning start demonstration, set the winning start demonstration display time, set the winning start demonstration effect Execute the command request and the command request for the firing position designation effect. If the result of hit determination is lost, the end of the operation of the special symbol variation time reduction function and the normal symbol probability variation function is determined, the variation pattern selection state is updated, the game state command is requested, and the special symbol is determined. In order to end the operation, the state of the special symbol is set to "standby for special symbol variation", and the command request for the launch position designation effect is executed.

In the special electric auditors control process (S330), in order to execute the processing related to the special electric auditors, the operating state of the condition device and the special electric auditors is inspected, and the condition device is in operation or the special electric auditors are in operation When it is determined, the processing related to the special electric accessory is executed. Depending on the operating state of the special electric accessory, processing during preparation for opening the special electric accessory, processing during operation of the special electric accessory, processing during closing of the large winning opening, processing during the jackpot end demonstration, processing during the small winning start demonstration, small winning special electric In-operation processing, small-hit big winning opening closed processing, and small-hit end demonstration processing are executed.

In order to save the result of valid period determination of the big winning opening 20 in the big winning opening valid period setting process (S332), when the value of the big winning opening valid time is 0, the big winning opening valid period flag is set. Stores the mouth invalid period data, and when it is other than 0, stores the big winning mouth valid period data in the big winning mouth valid period flag.

In the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334), the operating state of the special symbol is monitored, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol is ready to start varying. When the order of digestion of the reserved balls of special symbols is the priority digestion of the second special symbol, (1) not during the big hit or the minor hit, (2) the first special symbol is waiting for fluctuation, (3) ) that the second special symbol is waiting for variation, and (4) that the number of operation pending balls of the special symbol is other than 0, when all are satisfied, the special symbol is in a state where variation can be started. I judge. In addition to the above (1) to (3), (5) the total number of reserved balls with special symbols must be other than 0, and (6) the relevant When the judgment is satisfied with the order of execution, that is, the order of winning, it is judged that the special symbols are ready to start changing.

When it is determined that the special pattern is ready to start fluctuating, the number of operation reserved balls of the special pattern is subtracted, and a performance command corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is requested. As a result, the sub board 300 is notified that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has been updated.

Subsequently, the hit determination of the special symbol is executed. In the hit determination, it is determined whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss based on the special symbol hit random number, and the determination result is stored in the special symbol determination flag. Next, determine the pattern. In the determination of the pattern, if the hit judgment is a big hit, the big hit pattern is decided based on the special pattern per pattern random number, if it is a small hit, the small hit pattern is decided, and if it is a loss, it is a losing pattern. is determined.

When the result of the hit determination is a big hit, based on the value of the group determination number indicating the type of the hit pattern determined in the design determination process, the operation content of the probability variation function of the special symbol is determined, and the special symbol is determined. The game state after the end of the big win is set, such as the operating contents of the variable time shortening function and the easy winning state of normal symbols. Subsequently, the settings during the big win are executed, such as the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously and the contents of the opening time of the big prize opening. Subsequently, based on the result of the hit determination and the operating state of the probability variation function of normal symbols, the content of the variation pattern selection state is set by selecting the variation pattern table to be referred to after the end of the big win. Next, a start demonstration time and an end demonstration time are set with reference to a table selected based on the value of the group determination number indicating the game state and the type of winning symbol. Subsequently, the area of the main RAM 291 used for hit determination and design determination is cleared, and the state of the special design is set to "variation start".

When the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the content of the variation pattern selection state is set by selecting the variation pattern table to be referred to after the end of the small hit, the start demonstration time and the end demonstration time are set, and the hit The area of the main RAM 291 used for judgment and design determination is cleared, and the state of the special design is set to "variation start". If the result of the hit determination is a loss, the area of the main RAM 291 used for the hit determination and design determination is cleared, and the state of the special design is set to "variation start".

In the abnormality detection process (S336), the main CPU 290 functioning as the main error detection means 284 inspects the magnetic detection signal, disconnection/short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, radio wave detection signal, and door/frame opening signal, and detects any change in the error state. If there is, the error state is stored and the sub board 300 is requested to display the error state presentation of the game machine. At this time, the light emission mode of light emitting means such as an LED mounted on the control board may be controlled according to the error state. If there is no change in the error state, the request for storing the error state and displaying the error state rendering is not executed.

In the entering ball passing time abnormality detection process (S338), the main CPU 290 functioning as the main error detection means 284 monitors the continuous ON time of each switch level to detect the entering ball passing time abnormality, and measures the continuous ON time ( For example, when it is determined that the value of a counter that is incremented at each interrupt when the switch is on) is an abnormal value, the setting of the entry passage time abnormality, the command transmission request, and the security information output to the external information output terminal 160 Create an output claim in order. At this time, the light emission mode of light emitting means such as an LED mounted on the control board may be controlled in accordance with the ball passing time abnormality. If it is determined that the continuous ON time is not abnormal, security output request creation is not executed.

In the game state display process (S340), in order to request the display of the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously, the error state, the number of normal symbols in operation pending balls, and the number of special symbols in operation pending balls, respective displays are displayed. Create data.

In the steering wheel state signal inspection process (S342), the steering wheel state is inspected in order to monitor the touch state of the steering wheel. Update, set the steering wheel state monitoring timer, and request to send a steering wheel state rendering command. As a result of the inspection, if it is determined that there is no change in the steering wheel state, the steering wheel state monitoring timer is set. If the result of decrementing the value of the handle state monitoring timer is other than 0, it is determined that the timer is being decremented, and the subsequent processing is not executed.

In the LED output process (S344), the display of the special symbol, the display of the normal symbol, the display of the number of activated balls of the special symbol, the number of activated suspended balls of the normal symbol, the display of the game state, and the special electric accessory are displayed continuously. Initialization of the display to display the number of times it operates, display the operating state of the special electric accessory when the accessory continuous operation device is not activated, display the hitting division, display errors, and display the prize ball ratio , acquisition and output of display data.

In the firing control signal output process (S346), in order to output a signal for prohibiting/permitting the firing of game balls, the communication state with the payout control board 155 and the setting of the prohibiting/permitting the firing corresponding to the disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality, and After obtaining the firing prohibition/permission data, a firing prohibition/permission signal is output.

In the test signal output process (S348), a signal to be output to the test equipment is created and output to the corresponding output port.

In the solenoid output process (S350), in order to output the output data of the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 and the large winning opening solenoid 92, the output data of the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 is obtained, and the output data of the large winning opening solenoid 92 is obtained. Acquire and output data output. The operating flag and operating timer of each solenoid are acquired, and the output data corresponding to the acquired solenoid operating flag and solenoid operating timer are acquired. Subsequently, the solenoid activation timer is updated, and the output data is output to the solenoid output port.

In the performance control command transmission process (S352), it is checked whether or not there is a transmission request for a command to be transmitted to the sub board 300, and if it is determined that there is a transmission request, the requested command data is acquired, and the used command buffer is set to 0. Clear, acquire MODE data corresponding to the acquired command data, output MODE data, hold MODE data, acquire EVENT data corresponding to the acquired command data, and output EVENT data in this order.

In the external information output process (S354), a signal to be output to the external information output terminal 160 is created, and the created signal is output to the external information output port.

Random numbers used in the operation process of the main board 200 will be described in more detail. The random numbers used in the main board 200 mainly include random numbers per normal symbol and normal pattern variation pattern random numbers as random numbers related to normal symbols, and random numbers per special symbol (hard random numbers) as random numbers related to special symbols. , special symbol per soft random number, special symbol per symbol random number, fluctuation pattern random number. In addition, as the random number for giving the initial value of the random number per normal symbol, the random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol, which is the initial value update type random number, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial value per special symbol There are random numbers and soft default random numbers per special symbol.

The random number per normal symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process and stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM291. The random number per normal symbol is, in the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interrupt process, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first operation opening 31 or the second operation opening 32, the normal number of reserved symbol variations. is less than the upper limit of 4, it is acquired from a predetermined position in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291 . The normal symbol random number is used for determination of hit determination and stop symbol when it is determined to start the normal symbol variation in the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324).

The normal symbol variation pattern random number takes a value of 0 to 232, for example, is updated in various random number update processing (S306) of the interrupt processing, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM291. Normal symbol variation pattern random number, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first operation opening 31 or the second operation opening 32 in the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interrupt processing, the normal symbol variation is suspended. If the number is less than the upper limit of 4, it is acquired from a predetermined location in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291 . The normal symbol variation pattern random number is used for determining the normal symbol variation pattern when it is determined to start the normal symbol variation in the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324).

The random number per special symbol is obtained when it is confirmed that the game ball has won a prize when the number of balls with the first special symbol or the second special symbol activated is less than 4 in the start port monitoring control process (S326) of the interrupt process. , the values of the built-in random number and the soft random number per special symbol are acquired, and the two are added and stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291 . The special symbol hit random number is used for executing the big hit determination and the small hit determination in the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

The soft random number per special symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process and stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM291. The soft random number per special symbol is stored in the main RAM 291 when it is confirmed that the game ball has won a prize when the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the starting port monitoring control process (S326). and is used to generate a random number per special symbol, as described above.

The special symbol per symbol random number takes a value of, for example, 0 to 999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 7), is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. Stored. The special symbol per symbol random number is stored in the main RAM 291 when it is confirmed that the game ball has won a prize when the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the starting port monitoring control process (S326). , and stored in another area of the main RAM 291 . The special symbol per symbol random number is used to determine a big hit symbol in the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process, when the hit determination is a big hit.

The variation pattern random number takes a value of, for example, 0 to 49999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 8), is updated in various random number update processes (S306) of interrupt processing, and is stored in a predetermined location of the main RAM 291. The fluctuation pattern random number is set to a predetermined value in the main RAM 291 when it is confirmed that the game ball has won a prize when the number of balls with the first special symbol or the second special symbol in operation is less than 4 in the starting port monitoring control process (S326). It is obtained from the location and stored in another area of the main RAM 291 . The variation pattern random number is used to determine the special symbol variation pattern in the special symbol control process (S328) of the interrupt process.

Normal per symbol initial value random number, special symbol per symbol initial value random number, and special per symbol soft initial value random number are the same values as normal per symbol random number, special symbol per symbol random number, and special symbol per soft random number respectively. It is updated in the initial value random number update process (S208) of the main process (S120) and the initial value random number update process (S310) of the interrupt process, and stored in a predetermined location in the main RAM 291. In the initial value update type random number update process (S308), the normal per symbol initial value random number, the special symbol per symbol initial value random number, and the special per symbol soft initial value random number are the normal per symbol random number, the special symbol per symbol random number, and the special symbol random number. When updating soft random numbers per symbol, it is used as the initial value of each random number.

Since the interrupt process is executed at regular time intervals by timer interrupt, various random number update processes (S306) and initial value update type random number update process (S308) included in the interrupt process are also executed at regular time intervals. be. That is, the normal per symbol random number, normal per symbol variation pattern random number, special per symbol random number, special per symbol soft random number, special symbol per symbol random number, and variation pattern random number are updated at regular intervals. On the other hand, in the main process (S120), the period from the end of the interrupt process to the occurrence of the next timer interrupt, that is, the time required for the interrupt process from the fixed time measured by the timer is calculated. Repeated for the reduced time. Since the time required for the interrupt process varies depending on the game state, etc., the initial value random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120) may be replaced with various random number update processes (S306) or initial value update type random number update process (S308). ), it is not executed at regular intervals. As a result, the initial value random number acquired when setting the initial value in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) can be made random each time.

FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing control start processing of the sub board 300 in the pachinko game machine. This control start process is executed by the sub initial process executing means 360 , but hereafter it will be described as being executed by the sub CPU 310 functioning as the sub initial process executing means 360 . When starting to control the sub board 300, the sub CPU 310 sets a stack pointer (S500), prohibits all interrupts until various initial settings are completed (S502), and performs register setting and port initialization of the sub CPU 310. Initialize the hardware (S504). The control program is read from the sub-ROM 312 and placed in the sub-RAM 311. Of the various variables in the control program, variables with initial values are set to initial values, and variables without initial values are set to zero-clear data. Thus, the sub-RAM 311 is initialized (S506). Interrupt processing in the sub-board 300 includes, as interrupt processing executed with the highest priority, processing upon power-up and reset processing upon occurrence of various abnormalities when the watchdog function is enabled. As interrupt processing of priority level 7 with the next highest execution priority, there is processing of a command received from the main substrate 200. As interrupt processing of priority level 3, which has the next highest priority, detection of CPU runaway by a watchdog timer. There is a time reset process. The interrupt processing of priority level 2, which has the next highest priority, is processing related to commands sent and received with the control CPU 320. The interrupt processing of priority level 1, which has the lowest priority, is communication processing with the real-time clock. and various device control processes such as lamps, solenoids, and motors. If interrupts related to the various processes described above occur at the same time, the interrupts having the highest priority set in advance for each type of interrupt are preferentially executed. The processing shown in the figure consists of the highest priority level interrupt, which is processing at power-on and reset processing upon occurrence of various errors, and the reset processing upon detection of CPU runaway, which is priority level 3 interrupt. include.

Interrupts other than commands received from the main board 200 (priority level 7) are prohibited (S510), and various error information used in the relevant model is set from all pre-stored error information for all models (S512). . All lamps such as the decorative lamp 111 are turned off (S514), the watchdog timer starts operating (S516), and the main process is executed (S518). Normally, the main processing of S518 does not return to this flow, but when it returns, it shifts to sleep (low power consumption mode) (S520).

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing in detail the main processing of S518 in FIG. In order to check whether or not the control program arranged in the sub-RAM 311 in S506 of FIG. All interrupts are permitted (S532), and devices such as motors and solenoids are initialized (S534).

If the watchdog timer is set to be used, the watchdog timer is cleared (S536), the decorative pattern counter is updated so that the combination of the decorative patterns is random (S540), and the input port of the sub CPU 310 is monitored (S542). In addition, since S540 is a process in the method of determining the missing decorative symbols using a counter, in the case of the method of determining the missing decorative symbols using a lottery sheet incorporating all the symbol combinations that are the missing symbols. , the process of S540 is not executed. The process of determining the missing decorative symbols using the lottery sheet is executed when a command indicating a special symbol stop symbol is received from the main board 200 in S552 as will be described later. The sub CPU 310 functioning as the sub error detection means 364 monitors the error state and, when various errors are detected, reports the error (S544), executes processing according to the input state of the effect button 109 (S546), An advance notice lottery is executed (S548). In addition, the advance notice lottery in S548 sends the notice effect command to appear immediately after the start of the pattern fluctuation to the effect control device 313 as early as possible, so that the lottery process is not processed in one loop, but multiple times. It is divided into loops, and the notice effect to appear immediately after the start of pattern fluctuation is drawn in the previous loop. If there is an operation request for a device such as a real-time clock, lamp, motor, solenoid, etc., the operation is executed (S550), the command saved in the command buffer is analyzed (S552), and if the command is immediately after analysis, the process proceeds to S536. Returning (Y of S554), if it is not immediately after command analysis (N of S554), the lottery soft random numbers are updated as low-priority processing that can be performed during idle time (S556), and the processing returns to S536. In S552, when the command to be analyzed indicates a special symbol variation pattern, the decorative symbol variation effect pattern is determined in the processing of S552, and when the analyzed command indicates a special symbol stop symbol, a lottery sheet is drawn. In the case of the method of determining the outlier pattern of the decorative pattern by using, the stop pattern of the decorative pattern is decided in the process of S552.

FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing interrupt processing when a command is received from the main board 200 . The main command received from the main board 200 is an interrupt command of priority level 7, which has the highest priority next to reset interrupt and error interrupt. The data received from the main substrate 200 is read to the input port, and when the same data is read twice in succession, the data is determined as a new command (Y of S600), and the determined command becomes the first command. If it is (MODE data) (Y of S602), the first command is stored in the temporary storage area (S604). A hard random number is obtained for subsequent processing (S606) and the original routine is returned to. By obtaining a hard random number every time there is an interrupt of a main command from the main board 200 in this manner, the randomness of the value is enhanced without generating periodicity in the timing of obtaining the random number. If the data read in S600 do not match two times in a row (up to five times can be read), S602 is skipped and the original routine is returned to (N of S600).

In S602, if the confirmed command is not the first command but the second command (N of S602), if it can be confirmed that the first command has already been properly received (Y of S608), the command buffer (command data (S610), and stores the first command and the second command in the command buffer (S612). The command data saved in the command buffer is analyzed in S552 of FIG. The command write pointer is updated (S614), the first command saved in the temporary storage area is cleared (S616), and the original routine is returned to. If the first command has not been received in S608, the process after S610 is skipped (N in S608) and the original routine is returned to.

FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing interrupt processing when a timer interrupt for effect display control occurs. This timer interrupt is a priority level 2 interrupt for transmitting a command relating to effect display from sub CPU 310 to control CPU 320, and occurs at a cycle of 500 μs. In this interrupt, the buffer is checked (S620), and if there is command data for transmission in the buffer (Y of S622), the command data is read (S624) and transmitted to the control CPU 320 (S626). The command data transmission to the control CPU 320 is attempted up to three times at predetermined time intervals until the sub CPU 310 receives from the control CPU 320 a command indicating normal reception on the control CPU 320 side. After transmission, the buffer read address setting is updated (S628), and the original routine is returned to. If there is no data for transmission in the buffer (N of S622), the processing after S624 is skipped and the original routine is returned to.

FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing interrupt processing when sub CPU 310 receives a command from control CPU 320 . This interrupt is also a priority level 2 interrupt. Sub CPU
The command received by 310 from control CPU 320 is mainly a command indicating that the command transmitted from sub CPU 310 to control CPU 320 has been received normally. When a command is received from the control CPU 320, the received command data is read (S630), the command is analyzed (S632), saved in the command buffer (S634), and the original routine is returned to.

FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing interrupt processing when a timer interrupt for controlling various devices occurs. This timer interrupt is for lamp control such as the decorative lamp 111, solenoid and motor control for driving the movable accessory 66, and management control of various timers, and occurs at a 1 ms cycle. Since the interrupt is of priority level 1, which has the lowest priority, interrupts of priority level 2 or higher are permitted (S640), and a signal indicating input from the production button 109, a signal indicating error detection, and a signal indicating power failure. , input/output of ports for inputting/outputting drive signals to devices to be controlled such as motors and solenoids (S642). At this time, if a signal indicating power failure is input, the process immediately proceeds to backup processing. Data related to device control is updated (S644), such as count processing based on the control pattern of devices such as motors and solenoids, and on/off control of buffers for writing data to the port in S642, and a timer is set to measure the timing of the performance. update (S646), update the timer for managing the effective input time of the production button 109 (S648), and update the task control counter for lighting switching control of the decoration lamp 111, runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320, etc. to create a 16 ms period (S650).

Note that the minimum unit of lighting switching control of the decoration lamp 111 is 16 ms. One frame of image display control is 16 ms or 32 ms, and by setting an integral multiple thereof as the minimum unit of lighting switching control of the decoration lamp 111, it is possible to easily synchronize the lamp control and the image display control. Also, in the case of counting a relatively long period of time, such as error reporting for 30 seconds, if one interrupt (1 ms) cycle count is used, the count value will be longer than necessary. The count value can also be shortened by using the count value of the cycle.

The task control has 16 kinds of tasks from processes 0 to 15, one of which is lighting switching control of the decoration lamp 111 and two tasks are runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320 . Lighting switching control of the decoration lamp 111 is performed once every 16 interrupts according to the count value of the task control counter, thereby realizing switching at a cycle of 16 ms. The runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320 is assigned to, for example, processing 0 and processing 8, and when the count values of the task control counter are 0 and 8, that is, once every 8 interrupts, the toggle signal from the control CPU 320 is monitored (S652). By doing so, monitoring at a period of 8 ms is realized.

Note that the control CPU 320 outputs a toggle signal that turns on and off every frame, and if the toggle signal does not change continuously for 1600 ms with the same value, it is determined that the control CPU 320 is out of control, and the sub CPU 310 sends a reset signal to the control CPU 320, and the control CPU 320 that receives the reset signal executes the reset. Since the toggle signal is received from the control CPU 320 at a cycle of one frame (16 ms or 32 ms), monitoring is performed at a cycle of 8 ms, which is shorter than that cycle. Finally, the timer that manages a relatively long error notification period, such as error notification for 30 seconds, is decremented (S654), and the error notification ends when the timer times out.

FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the process of special symbol variation display. When the second success/failure lottery value is reserved (Y of S700), the second success/failure determination means 222 reads out the second success/failure lottery value and determines whether the second special symbol 52 wins or fails (S702). The determination means 222 determines the stop symbol of the second special symbol 52 (S704), and the second variation pattern determination means 232 determines the second
A variation pattern of the special symbol 52 is determined (S706), and a variation start command is transmitted to the sub board 300 together with the determined result to start the symbol variation of the second special symbol 52 (S716).

If the second lottery value is not reserved (N of S700), but the first lottery value is reserved (Y of S708), the first success determination means 221 performs the first lottery The value is read out and the validity of the first special symbol 51 is determined again (S710), the first validity determination means 221 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol 51 (S712), and the first variation pattern determination means 231 determines the first A variation pattern of one special symbol 51 is determined (S714), and a variation start command is transmitted to the sub board 300 along with the determined result to start symbol variation of the first special symbol 51 (S716). If the first win/fail lottery value is not reserved, the process from S710 to S722 is skipped (N of S708).

The special symbol pattern variation display is processed (S718), S718 is repeated until the predetermined variation time elapses and the symbol display stop timing is reached (N of S720), and the symbol display stops after the predetermined variation time elapses. When the timing is reached (Y of S720), a variation stop command is transmitted to the sub board 300 to stop the symbol variation being displayed at the predetermined stop symbol (S722), and the variation display of the special symbols is terminated. do.

FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the process of decorative symbol variation display. The effect determining means 303 of the sub board 300 receives a command indicating the start of variation and the contents of the effect display from the main board 200 (S750), and the decorative symbols are stopped according to the received stop symbol, variation pattern, and success/failure determination result of the special symbol. A mode is determined (S752), and a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is determined (S754). Here, if the premonitory setting is turned on by prior determination (Y of S756), the already determined variable effect pattern is a pattern that includes specific effect content that should be avoided from being superimposed on the advance notice effect. If it is not (N of S758), and if it is not a symbol change that triggered the turning on of the precursor setting (N of S760), the setting to display a predetermined advance notice effect is executed (S764), and the precursor setting is executed. If it is the symbol variation that triggered the turn-on (Y of S760), the precursor setting is turned off (S762). If the precursor setting is not ON (N of S756), or if the specific effect content is included in the variable effect pattern (Y of S758), the processing from S760 to S764 is skipped.

After that, the variable effect display of the decorative symbols is started (S766), the variable effect display process of the decorative symbols (S768), and the display process of the advance notice effect are executed (S770). S768 and S770 are repeated (N of S772), and when a variation stop command is received (Y of S772), the symbol variation display is stopped by stopping and displaying the decorative symbols in the stop mode determined in S752 (S774 ), and ends the decorative symbol variation effect (S776).

FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the process of the special game. First, the effect display control means 305 starts the special game effect processing (S800), and the opening/closing control means 275 opens the big winning opening 20 (S802). If the predetermined opening time has not passed (N of S804) and the number of balls entering the big winning opening 20 has not reached 9 or more, the process returns to S804 (N of S806), and whether the predetermined opening time has passed ( Y in S804), but the opening time has not elapsed (N in S804), but when the number of balls entering the big winning hole 20 reaches 9 or more (Y in S806), the opening/closing control means 275 opens the big winning hole. 20 is closed (S810).

If the unit game has not reached the final round (N of S810), add 1 to the number of rounds and return to S802 (S812), and if the unit game has reached the final round (Y of S810), effect display. The control means 305 terminates the effect processing of the special game (S814), the special game control means 260 terminates the special game (S816), and starts execution of the specific game, ie, variable probability, short working hours, easy entry state (S818). ).

FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the process of the small winning game. In the small winning game, a unit game executed only once is started (S819), the big winning opening 20 is opened (S820), the opening is continued until a predetermined opening time elapses (N of S822), and the opening is continued. If the time has elapsed (Y of S822), the big prize opening 20 is closed (S824), and if the set number of times of opening and closing has not been completed (N of S826), 1 is added to the number of times of opening and closing, and the process returns to S820. (S828), if opening and closing for the set number of times is completed (Y of S826), the small hit game is terminated.

In the base technology, the number of jackpot balls in the second game is generally larger than that in the first game. , but in another example, the first game may be designed so that the expected value of winning balls is higher than that of the second game. However, it may be designed so that the expected values of winning balls in the first game and the second game are substantially equal. In the latter case, the average number of unit games included in the special game executed in the first game and the special game executed in the second game may be designed to be equal. For example, in the first game, a special game in which the unit game is executed 10 times with a probability of 100% is executed, and in the second game, a special game in which the unit game is executed 4 times with a probability of 50%. However, a special game may be executed in which the unit game is executed 16 times with a probability of 50%. Also, in any case, a specific area is provided in the big winning opening, and if the game ball that entered the big winning opening enters the specific area or passes through the specific area, in the normal game after the special game ends It may be configured such that a specific game such as a variable probability state is implemented. In this case, the special game executed when the second game results in a big hit is more likely to enter the specific area than the special game performed when the first game results in a big win. is high, and the probability that the normal game in the variable probability state is executed after the special game is finished may be configured to be high. For example, there are a first win in which a special game is executed in which it is relatively difficult to enter a specific area, and a second win in which a special game is executed in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area. It may be configured such that the second game has a higher probability of winning the second prize than the first game. Alternatively, the probability of getting the second win in the first game is less than 100%, but the probability of getting the second win in the second game may be 100%.

(Example 1: falling type)
The characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described below. In the present embodiment, fall determination is executed to determine whether or not a fall from the variable probability state to the normal probability state is possible based on the lottery value acquired when the ball enters the starting hole. After the special game ends, when the state is shifted to the probability variation state, the fall determination is executed with the start of the pattern variation as a trigger. When the fall determination is made to cause the player to fall to the normal probability state, the probability change state ends after that, and the state is shifted to the normal probability state. On the other hand, if the continuation determination is made not to fall to the normal probability state in the fall determination, the probability variation state is continued thereafter.

In this embodiment, the first lottery means 211 of FIG. 4 is further provided with the first fall determination means, and the second lottery means 212 is further provided with the second fall determination means. The first fall determination means executes fall determination based on the lottery value acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 . The second fall determination means executes fall determination based on the lottery value acquired by the second lottery value acquisition means 217 . The first lottery value acquisition means 216 acquires the first fall lottery value for the fall judgment by the first fall judgment means from the random number generation means 202 when the ball enters the first starting hole 11 . The first falling lottery value acquired by the first lottery value acquiring means 216 is acquired separately from the first winning lottery value, the first symbol lottery value and the first pattern lottery value. The second lottery value acquisition means 217 acquires the second fall lottery value for fall determination by the second fall determination means from the random number generation means 202 when the ball enters the second starting hole 12 . The second falling lottery value acquired by the second lottery value acquiring means 217 is acquired separately from the second winning lottery value, the second pattern lottery value and the second pattern lottery value. As a modification, the first falling lottery value may be obtained not when the ball enters the first starting port 11, but when the first special symbol pattern variation is started. Similarly, the second falling lottery value may be obtained not when the ball enters the second starting port 12, but when the pattern variation of the second special symbol is started.

The first drop lottery value acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 and the second drop lottery value acquired by the second lottery value acquisition means 217 are reserved for special figures until a new symbol variation corresponding to the lottery value is started. It is reserved in means 241 . The prior determination means 235 can determine in advance the first drop lottery value and the second drop lottery value reserved by the special figure reservation means 241 before the start of the symbol variation corresponding to the lottery value. The preliminary determination means 235 performs preliminary determination of the transition of the game state based on the preliminary determination result of the first drop lottery value and the second drop lottery value, and the game state when the lottery value targeted for the preliminary determination is finally determined. It is possible to determine in advance whether is in a stochastic variable state or a normal stochastic state. Pre-determination means 235 can pre-determine the lottery value to be reserved in the special figure reservation means 241 according to the transition of the pre-determined gaming state.

In this embodiment, the specific game control means 270 of FIG. 4 is provided with probability state control means and entering ball state control means. The probability state control means shifts from a normal probability state in which the probability of the result of the success/failure determination to be a big hit is a predetermined probability to a probability change state in which the probability of the result of the success/failure determination to be a big win is higher than the predetermined probability. The probability state control means shifts to the probability variable state after the end of the special game when a condition enabling transition to the probability variable state is satisfied. The probability state control means shifts to the normal probability state after the end of the special game or the start of the symbol variation when the conditions for enabling the transition to the normal probability state are satisfied. The ball-entering state control means shifts from a normal ball-entering state in which the ease of entering a ball into the second starting hole 12 is relatively low to an easy-to-enter state in which the ease of entering a ball into the second starting hole 12 is relatively high. Let The ball-entering state control means shifts to the easy-ball-entering state after the end of the special game when the conditions for allowing the transition to the easy-ball-entering state are satisfied. When the conditions for ending the easy ball entry state (or the conditions for shifting to the normal ball entry state) are satisfied, the ball entry state control means shifts to the normal ball entry state after the end of the special game, or changes the pattern. The start or end is used as a trigger to shift to the normal entry state.

The probability state control means enables transition to the probability change state after the end of the special game executed with the predetermined kind of jackpot symbols stopped and displayed. For example, as the types of symbols indicating a big hit, a probability variation jackpot symbol (first jackpot symbol) and a non-variability jackpot symbol (second jackpot symbol) are prepared, and a special that is executed after the first jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed After the end of the game, the state is shifted to the probability variation state, and after the end of the special game executed after the stop display of the second big win symbol, the state is shifted to the normal probability state. The probability state control means shifts to the normal probability state immediately after the fall determination when the fall determination to the effect of falling to the normal probability state is made. When the pattern variation of the special pattern is started, each determination is made in the order of fall determination, right/wrong determination, pattern determination, and variation pattern determination, and after each determination, the special pattern variation start processing is executed. Further, when a fall determination is made to cause the player to fall to the normal probability state, the processes are executed in the order of fall determination, transition from the probability change state due to the fall to the normal probability state, and success/failure determination. Therefore, when the pattern variation related to the fall determination to the effect of falling to the normal probability state is started, the game state (probability state) at the start of the pattern variation is the normal probability state, and the success/failure determination related to the pattern variation. The game state at the time of execution is also a normal probability state.

FIG. 30 shows in detail the game state transition at the time of fall determination. This figure shows a special symbol corresponding to the fall lottery value used for the fall determination when the fall judgment is made to fall to the normal probability state (low probability state) in the probability change state (high probability state). It shows the transition of the game state in the symbol variation (the variation) and the symbol variation before and after the variation. As shown in the figure, when the fall judgment is made, the game state is shifted with the fall judgment as a trigger, and at the timing of the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, which is started immediately after the success or failure judgment, the probability is already low from the high probability state. Moved to probabilistic state. As described above, when the symbol variation starts, the success/failure determination is executed after the fall determination, so the success/failure determination table for low probability is referred to in the success/failure determination after the fall determination.

In this embodiment, when the state is changed to the probability change state after the special game is finished, the state is changed to the probability change state and the ball entry easy state. The easy-to-enter state continues at least until the symbol variation reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), and when the symbol variation reaches the predetermined number, the probability variation state continues, or the state changes to the normal probability state. Whether or not the state of easy ball entry can be continued is determined depending on whether or not the player has fallen. Specifically, if the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times) and the probability variation state is reached, the easy-to-ball-enter state is continued. After that, when the number of pattern fluctuations exceeds a predetermined number (for example, after 101 times) when the pattern fluctuation is started, if a fall judgment is made to the effect that it will fall to the normal probability state, the normal probability state and normal ball entry state will be transitioned. Then, pattern variation is started in the normal probability state and the normal entry state. On the other hand, if it is in the normal probability state at the time when the number of symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), the easy-entering state is shifted to the normal-entering state upon completion of the symbol fluctuation. That is, until the 100th symbol variation is completed, the ball is in the easy-to-enter state, but after the 101st symbol variation, the state is changed to the normal ball-entering state. As a modification, if the normal probability state occurs when the number of symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), the transition from the easy-to-enter state to the normal-entering state may be triggered by the start of the symbol fluctuation. . In other words, the easy entry state is maintained until the end of the pattern fluctuation immediately before the number of pattern fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (for example, the 99th time), but the normal entry state may be established after the 100th pattern fluctuation. In addition, "symbol variation frequency" means the total number of the variation frequency of the first special symbol and the variation frequency of the second special symbol. In most cases, in the easy-to-enter state, only the second game in which the second special symbol is varied is played, so the number of symbol fluctuations that can be the end of the easy-to-enter state is equal to the cumulative number of fluctuations of the second special symbols. can match.

FIG. 31 shows the transition of the game state after shifting to the probability variable state and the easy-ball-entering state. In this figure, the probability change state is defined as "high probability" and the normal probability state is defined as "low probability". In addition, the easy ball entry state is defined as "high ball entry", and the normal ball entry state is defined as "low ball entry". This figure (a) shows a case where a fall determination is made to the effect that the player falls to the normal probability state in the first pattern variation after the end of the special game. In this case, from the first pattern variation after the end of the special game to the pattern variation where the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), there is a low probability and a high ball entry state. After that, when the number of symbol variations exceeds a predetermined number (the 101st time), a low probability and a low ball entry state occur from the symbol variations. In this figure (b), the number of pattern fluctuations that can be the end of the easy-to-enter state is a predetermined number (e.g., 100 It shows a case where the fall determination is made to the effect that the character falls to the normal probability state before the symbol variation becomes 10 times). In this case, when the pattern variation starts for the first time after the end of the special game, there is a high probability and a high ball entry state, and after that, when the pattern variation starts within a predetermined number of times (2nd to 100th). When a fall determination is made to the effect that the player falls to the normal probability state at the beginning, a low probability and high ball entry state is established from the pattern variation related to the fall determination until the pattern variation reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times). After that, when the number of symbol variations exceeds a predetermined number (the 101st time), a low probability and a low ball entry state occur from the symbol variations. This figure (c) shows the case where the fall determination to the effect of falling to the normal probability state is not made until the symbol variation reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), and all determinations are continued. In this case, the high-probability, high-ball-entering state continues until the fall judgment to the effect that it falls to the normal-probability state is made. state.

In the state of easy ball entry (high ball entry state), the operation of the normal electric accessory 90 increases the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port 12. It becomes playability to do. On the other hand, in the normal ball entry state (low ball entry state), the ease of ball entry into the second starting port 12 is low,
Since it is impossible or difficult to enter the ball into the second starting hole 12, it becomes a game characteristic of "left hitting" toward the first starting hole 11. - 特許庁In order to prompt the player to perform an appropriate shooting operation according to the game state, the effect display device 60 displays a "guidance display" to prompt the shooting of the game ball in a predetermined direction. For example, in the ball-entering easy state, a right-handed display for prompting the player to shoot a game ball to the right is displayed. It should be noted that a display device other than the effect display device 60 may indicate to the player that the game state should be played to the right. By doing so, a guide display may be made to indicate that the game state is to hit to the right. In addition, guidance display that is displayed on the production display device 60 in a dramatic manner and guidance display by turning on a "right-handed indicator lamp" such as an LED lamp may be used together.

FIG. 32 shows an example of effect display in the easy-to-enter state. As shown in the figure, decorative symbols composed of a plurality of rows (for example, three rows) of decorative symbols are variably displayed in the center of the screen, and "Right" is displayed at the top of the screen to indicate that the game state is to hit to the right. A "strike display" is made. The right-handed display is composed of a combination of the words "right-handed" and an arrow or symbol indicating the right direction. Words and symbols included in the right-handed display may be displayed by scrolling to the right. The right-handed display may be fixedly displayed in a specific display area such as the upper right of the screen. The right-handed display may be set with a higher display priority so that it is displayed in front of the decorative symbols and other effect displays. In the lower right part of the screen, the remaining number of times (70 times) is displayed until reaching a predetermined number of symbol variations that can be the end of the easy-to-enter state. In addition, the display mode of the remaining number of times is not limited to the example shown in this figure. , etc., may be temporarily displayed. For example, when the number of remaining times is a specific number (for example, a multiple of 10 such as 30 times, 20 times, or 10 times), a highlighting such as "30 times remaining!" When the number of times is less than the number (for example, 9 times or less), a highlight display for counting down the remaining number of times such as "9 remaining!", "8 remaining!", ..., "0 remaining!" may be displayed in the center of the screen. Such highlighting of the remaining number of times and the display of the remaining number of times always displayed near the outer periphery of the screen shown in this figure may be used together. The display area for highlighting the remaining number of times may be larger than the display area for the remaining number of times. The remaining number of times displayed on the screen is the remaining number of times of the easy-to-enter state that is guaranteed at a minimum regardless of the number of times of design fluctuation that causes the fall to fall, and the number of times of pattern fluctuation is predetermined. If the fall determination is not made before the number (for example, 100 times) is reached, the easy-enter state may continue in symbol variations exceeding a predetermined number (for example, after 101 times). When the easy-to-enter state continues in symbol variations exceeding a predetermined number (for example, after 101 times), the remaining number of times is not counted down at the start of the symbol variation such as "?" It may be possible to indicate to the player that the easy-to-ball-enter state will continue further by switching to a hidden display mode. This embodiment is premised on the fall determination, but in the modified example in which the fall determination is not executed, the remaining number of times displayed on the screen is not the minimum guaranteed remaining number of easy-to-enter states, but the number of times to enter the ball. It may correspond to the actual remaining number of times until the end of the easy state.

The right-handed display described above disappears when the easy-ball-entering state (high-ball-entering state) ends. In other words, it is hidden at the timing of transition to the normal ball entry state (low ball entry state). It should be noted that the timing of shifting from the easy-entering state to the normal-entering state may be triggered by the start or end of the symbol variation when the number of symbol variations that can be the final stage of the easy-entering state reaches a predetermined number (100 times). can. Specifically, it can be immediately after the start of the symbol variation when the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (100 times), or after the symbol variation stops when the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (100 times). In this embodiment, when the number of pattern fluctuations after the end of the special game is within a predetermined number (for example, 1 to 100 times) when the pattern fluctuation starts, when the fall determination is made to the effect that it falls to the normal probability state. , Immediately before the start of the symbol variation when the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times) (corresponding to FIG. 33(a) described later) or after the variation stops (corresponding to FIG. 33(b) described later) Easy ball entry state From is transferred to the normal entry state. Here, after the fluctuation of the symbol fluctuation is stopped may be the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, or the end timing of the stop display period in which the stop display state of the special symbol is maintained until the next symbol fluctuation is started. There may be.

FIG. 33 shows in detail the game state transition at the end of the easy-to-ball-enter state. This figure shows a game in a special symbol pattern variation (100th time) in which the number of pattern variations that can be the end of the easy-to-enter state (high-ball state) is a predetermined number, and symbol variations before and after that (99th and 101st times). Indicates a state transition. In this figure (a) and (b), the fall judgment is made to the effect that the number of symbol fluctuations falls within a predetermined number (1st to 100th), and the number exceeds the predetermined number (101st and subsequent times). ) shows a case where the high ball winning state does not continue during symbol fluctuation. This figure (a) shows the case where the game state is shifted with the start of the symbol variation (the 100th time) where the number of symbol variations after the end of the special game is a predetermined number. It is transitioning from the ball state to the low ball entry state. This figure (b) shows a case where the game state is shifted at the end of the symbol variation (the 100th time) where the number of symbol variations after the end of the special game is a predetermined number, and the game state is shifted at the timing when the variation of the special symbol is stopped. It is transitioning from the ball state to the low ball entry state. It should be noted that, instead of the special symbol variation stop timing, after the symbol variation (100th time) where the number of symbol variations after the end of the special game is a predetermined number, and before the start of the next symbol variation (101st time). A ball state may be transitioned to a low ball entry state. For example, as described above, at the end timing of the stop display period of the special symbols, the state may be shifted from the high ball entry state to the low ball entry state.

FIG. 34 shows an example of effect display in the case where the easy-ball-entering state ends with the start of symbol variation, which is the end of the easy-ball-entering state. This figure corresponds to the state transition shown in FIG. 33(a). This figure (a) shows an example of the display when the last (99th) symbol variation stops when the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number. In the lower right, the remaining number of easy-ball-entering states is one. At this time, right hitting display is made on the upper part of the screen. This figure (b) shows an example of the display at the start of the pattern change when the number of pattern changes reaches a predetermined number (the 100th time). times. At this time, the right-handed shot display at the top of the screen is not displayed, suggesting that the easy-to-ball-enter state has ended. This figure (c) shows a display example when the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (the 100th time) and the symbol variations are stopped, and the decorative symbols are displayed in the center of the screen in an off-state. After that, when the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (the 100th time) and the symbol variations stop changing, as shown in FIG.
RUSH finished" is displayed, and a guide display is made to urge the player to return to left-handed batting. It should be noted that the display of "BATTLE RUSH finished" and the display of "Please return to left-handed batting" in FIG. For example, when the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (the 100th time), when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed (that is, before the special symbol variation stops), "BATTLE RUSH end" is displayed, and then At the start of the variation when the special symbols and decorative symbols are stopped and the next symbol variation is started, or during the subsequent variation display, a guidance display of "please return to left hand shot" may be displayed. In other words, the guide display prompting the player to return to left-handed is not displayed until the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (the 100th time), and is displayed after the start of the next symbol variation. may

FIG. 35 shows an example of effect display in the case where the easy-ball-entering state ends with the end of the symbol variation that is the end of the easy-ball-entering state. This figure shows the case where the state transition shown in FIG. 33(b) is made. Similar to FIG. 34(a), FIG. 34(a) shows an example of the display when the pattern variation stops before the number of pattern variations reaches a predetermined number (99th time), and a decorative pattern is displayed in the center of the screen. It is displayed in a stopped state in a disengaged state, and the number of times remaining in the easy-to-enter state is one more at the bottom right of the screen. At this time, right hitting display is made on the upper part of the screen. This figure (b) shows a display example at the start of the symbol variation when the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (the 100th time). times. At this time, the right-handed display at the top of the screen is continuously displayed, suggesting that the easy-to-ball-enter state continues. This figure (c) shows a display example when the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (the 100th time) and the symbol variations are stopped, and the decorative symbols are displayed in the center of the screen in an off-state. Even at this time, the right-hand hitting display at the top of the screen is continuously displayed. After that, when the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (the 100th time) and the symbol variations stop changing, as shown in FIG. A message is displayed, the display of right-handed batting at the top of the screen is hidden, and a guidance display prompting the player to return to left-handed batting is provided. It should be noted that, in FIG. 4(d) as well, the display of "BATTLE RUSH finished" and the display of "Please return to left-handed batting" may not be displayed at the same time, but may be displayed at different timings. For example, when the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (the 100th time), when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed (that is, before the special symbol variation stops), "BATTLE RUSH end" is displayed, and then After the special symbol and the decorative symbol are stopped and displayed and the next symbol variation starts, the guide display of "Please return to left hand shot" may be displayed. In other words, the guide display prompting the player to return to left-handed is not displayed until the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (the 100th time), and is displayed after the start of the next symbol variation. may

FIG. 36 shows an example of effect display in the case where the easy-ball-entering state continues even after the end of the symbol variation that can be the end of the easy-ball-entering state. This figure corresponds to the state transition in FIG. 31(b). 35A to 35C are similar to FIGS. 35A to 35C. When the number of symbol fluctuations in this figure (c) reaches a predetermined number (100th time) when the fluctuation of the symbol fluctuations is stopped, the decorative pattern is displayed in an off state, and then the number of symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (100th time). When the pattern fluctuation stops, as shown in (d) of this figure, the wording "EXTRA RUSH rush!!" is displayed to indicate that the easy ball entry state and the probability fluctuation state continue, and the right hit is displayed at the top of the screen. The display is also continuously displayed. In addition, this figure (d) may be displayed during the symbol variation next to the symbol variation when the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (100th). In addition, this figure (d) may be displayed before the symbol variation stops changing when the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (the 100th time), and after the display of this figure (d) is performed, the number of symbol variations is a predetermined number (100th time), the symbol variation may be stopped.

FIG. 37 shows in detail the transition of the game state when it is determined that the game will fall to the normal probability state after the number of symbol variations exceeds a predetermined number. In this figure, the probability fluctuation state ( (high-probability state) and the easy-ball-entering state (high-ball-entering state) continue, and then a fall determination is made to cause the player to fall. As mentioned above, when a fall judgment is made to fall, the high probability state is shifted to a low probability state immediately after the fall judgment to fall, so when the special symbol fluctuation starts, it is already low. It is in a stochastic state. At this time, since the high-ball entry state ends when the high-probability state ends, strictly speaking, the end timing of the high-probability state and the end timing of the high-ball entry state are not simultaneous. However, since the end timing of both the high probability state and the high ball entry state is before the start timing of the fluctuation of the special pattern related to the fall judgment, both the high probability state and the high ball entry state are before the start of the pattern fluctuation. can be said to end at about the same time. As a result, at the timing of the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol related to the fall judgment that it will fall, it has already been shifted to a low ball state, and the start of the pattern variation of the special symbol related to the fall judgment that it falls will hit right. Display is hidden.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing in detail the transition of the game state when the hit/fail determination is a big win after the number of symbol variations exceeds a predetermined number. In this figure, the probability fluctuation state ( High probability state) and easy-ball-entering state (high-ball-entering state) continue, and the result of winning/failure determination is a big hit. As shown in the figure, when the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit, the state is shifted from the high probability state to the low probability state immediately after the success/failure determination is made, so the game at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols related to the success/failure determination The state is already in the low probability state. At this time, the high-probability state ends when the high-probability state ends. All of the end timings of the ball states are before the fluctuation start timings of the special symbols related to the winning judgment as the big hit. As a result, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbols related to the hit/fail judgment of the big hit, the state has already shifted to the low ball entry state, and the start of the pattern variation of the special symbols corresponding to the lottery value for which the hit/fail judgment of the big hit is made is triggered. As a right-handed display is hidden. In addition, as a modification, the probability change state (high probability state) and the easy-to-ball state (high-ball state) continue in the pattern fluctuations where the number of pattern fluctuations exceeds a predetermined number (after 101 times). If it becomes a big hit, the high probability state is terminated immediately after the start of the symbol variation triggered by the start of the symbol variation of the special symbol related to the success judgment, and the high probability state is terminated immediately after the end of the high probability state It may be configured to end the high ball entry state. Here, "immediately after" means that the timing is substantially the same although it is later on the time series.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of effect display when the hit/fail determination is a big win after the number of times of symbol variation exceeds a predetermined number. This figure corresponds to the state transition in FIG. This figure (a) shows an example of display when the symbol variation is stopped before the symbol variation that becomes a big hit and the number of symbol variations exceeds a predetermined number (101st and subsequent times). In the center of the screen, a decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, and in the lower right of the screen, the words "EXTRA RUSH" are displayed, indicating that the player is staying in the mode in which the probability variation state and the easy-to-enter state continue. . A right-handed display is made at the top of the screen. This figure (b) shows a display example at the start of a symbol variation in which the number of symbol variations exceeds a predetermined number (after the 101st time) and the winning/failure determination result is a big hit. The decoration pattern in the center of the screen starts to change, and the words "EXTRA RUSH" are continuously displayed at the bottom right of the screen. At this time, the right-handed display at the top of the screen is not displayed, suggesting that the probability change state and the easy-to-ball state have ended. After that, when the number of pattern fluctuations exceeds a predetermined number (for example, after 101 times) and the pattern fluctuation is stopped and the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit, as shown in FIG. is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. After that, as shown in FIG. 4(d), the text "Get a SPECIAL BONUS!" is displayed to indicate that the special game is to be started, and the special game with the opening of the big winning slot is started. The screen display timing of FIG. 4(d) is when the number of symbol variations exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 101 times or more) and the symbol variations that result in a big win are stopped. If the big winning opening that opens during the special game is set in a position where it is easy to enter or can enter the ball by hitting with the right hand, a guide to hitting with the right hand will be displayed at the start demonstration of the special game, and the right hand will be displayed throughout the execution of the special game. Hit display continues. As a modification, "SPECIAL
Earn BONUS! ' may be displayed during the start demonstration of the special game, and a right-handed guidance display may be simultaneously displayed during the start demonstration.

Due to the above-described state transition, the high ball winning state continues at least until the number of symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (100 times), and the game state until the number of symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number is "high probability and high ball winning". Or it will be either "low probability and high ball entry". Since the player cannot directly know whether the probability of winning a big hit is high or low, until the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (100 times), whether or not the probability variation state exists. It can be a hidden "hidden mode". On the other hand, when the number of symbol variations exceeds a predetermined number, the game state becomes either "high probability and high ball entry" or "low probability and low ball entry". Therefore, when the number of pattern fluctuations exceeds a predetermined number, by confirming the operation of the normal electric accessory 90 (also referred to as a ball entry fluctuation mechanism) provided in the second start port 12, a high ball entry state or a low ball entry state can be confirmed. It can be determined which of the states it is, and indirectly whether it is a high-probability state or a low-probability state can be determined. Therefore, when the number of symbol fluctuations exceeds a predetermined number, it is possible to enter a "non-sneak mode" in which whether or not the probability fluctuation state is concealed.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the state is shifted to a high probability and high ball entry state after the end of the special game, at least until the number of symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (100 times), the high probability state or the low probability state The player will not be notified of whether the In other words, at least until the number of times of pattern variation reaches a predetermined number (100 times), the player is not notified of the fall even if the fall determination indicates that the player has fallen to a low probability state. As a result, there is a sense of expectation that the high probability state may continue until the start of pattern variation exceeding a predetermined number (the 101st time) at which it is possible to determine whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. It can be given to the player. As described above, when the number of pattern variations reaches a predetermined number (100 times), when the text "EXTRA RUSH rushes in!" It is possible to determine whether the pattern variation is in a high probability state or a low probability state when the number of times is a predetermined number (100 times).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the number of pattern fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (100 times), the player is asked whether or not the high probability state will continue, and the player is asked whether or not the high probability state will continue. A notification performance to be notified can be executed. It is desirable that this notification effect be executed in the case of the symbol variation that results in the win/loss determination, and the notification effect may not be performed in the symbol variation that the result of the success/denial determination results in a big win. In order to make it possible to execute highly expected notification performance, it is made possible to select a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time (for example, 30 seconds) when the number of symbol variations is a predetermined number (100 times). good too. On the other hand, in the symbol variation whose number of symbol variations is other than the predetermined number (100 times), the "time saving variation pattern" with relatively short variation time may be selected to realize the time saving state. In the pattern variation where the number of symbol variations is other than the predetermined number (100 times), the variation time is shortened according to the number of retentions of the lottery value retained in the special figure retention means 241 "shortened variation" or "super shortened variation ”may be realized, and a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is selected when the number of reservations is 3 or 4 compared to when the number of reservations is 1 or 2 good. More specifically, it is configured so that a pattern with a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol as the number of retentions of the first winning lottery value retained in the special figure retention means 241 increases. It may be configured so that a pattern with a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol as the number of retentions of the second win/fail lottery value retained in the figure retention means 241 increases. In addition, in this embodiment, in order to give priority to the variable display of the second special symbol in the high ball entry state, regardless of the number of reservations of the first winning lottery value, the number of holdings of the second winning lottery value is relatively large. In the case (for example, when 3 pieces are reserved), a pattern with a short variation time (for example, 3 seconds) is likely to be selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. It is preferable that a pattern with a long variation time (for example, 10 seconds) is likely to be selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the case of suspension). In addition, if the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit, a relatively long variation pattern (eg 60 seconds) is selected regardless of the number of reservations, so the result of the success/failure determination will be out of the pattern variation. It is preferable to apply the above specifications in the variation pattern that is used.

When the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (100 times), a specific variation pattern for notification effect (variation pattern for notification) may be necessarily selected. In addition, when the fall judgment is made to the effect that the number of design fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (100 times) (including the case where the fall judgment is made in the fall judgment related to the 100th design fluctuation) Only in this case, it is also possible to always select the notification variation pattern for notifying that the player is falling when the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (100 times). In other words, the fall determination is not made to the effect that the number of design fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (100 times), and the number of design fluctuations exceeds the predetermined number (after 101 times). When the ball state is continued, the notification variation pattern may not be selected in the symbol variation with the predetermined number of symbol variations (100 times). At this time, it is possible to always select a variation pattern other than the notification variation pattern in the symbol variation with the predetermined number (100 times) of the symbol variation frequency, or to select the notification variation pattern at a constant rate. good too. When the variation pattern for notification is not selected, the variation pattern for time saving may be selected, and it may be configured so that the variation pattern with a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected as the number of reservations is larger.

The notification effect described above may be configured to be completed in one symbol variation period, or may be configured to be executed over a plurality of symbol variation periods. In the latter case, a specific variation pattern for notification effect (variation pattern for notification) may be selected in all of the plurality of symbol variations for executing the notification effect. For example, a specific notification variation pattern can be selected in a plurality of (for example, 5) symbol variations (that is, 96 to 100 symbol variations) until the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (100 times). There may be. At this time, each variation time of a plurality of symbol variations (for example, 96 times to 100 times of symbol variations) may be common, or each variation time may not be common. For example, when the symbol variation frequency is other than the predetermined number (for example, 96 times to 99 times), a notification variation pattern with a relatively short variation time is selected. times), a notification variation pattern with a relatively long variation time may be selected.

If the number of pattern fluctuations exceeds a predetermined number (after 101 times) and the easy-to-enter state continues, select a "time-saving fluctuation pattern" with a relatively short fluctuation time, as with pattern fluctuations within a predetermined number. A time saving state may be realized. In pattern fluctuations where the number of pattern fluctuations exceeds a predetermined number (after 101 times), the fluctuation time is shortened according to the number of holdings of the lottery value held in the special figure holding means 241 "shortened fluctuation" or "super shortened Variation" may be realized, and a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is selected when the number of reservations is 3 or 4 compared to when the number of reservations is 1 or 2. good too. That is, it may be configured such that the greater the number of reservations, the more likely it is that a variation pattern with a shorter variation time will be selected. In addition, only a fixed variation pattern may be selected in pattern variations where the number of symbol variations exceeds a predetermined number (after 101 times), and the number of symbol variations is selected within a predetermined number (100 times). It may be possible to select a super-fast fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time than the time-saving fluctuation pattern for possible "shortened fluctuation" or "ultra-shortened fluctuation".

The selection tendency of the special symbol variation pattern may be changed or switched on the way according to the number of symbol variations after the special game is completed so that the above-mentioned specific variation pattern (variation pattern for notification, etc.) can be selected. . For example, prepare a first variation pattern selection criterion in which a specific variation pattern is not included in the selection candidates, and a second variation pattern selection criterion in which a specific variation pattern is included in the selection candidates, and the variation pattern according to the number of symbol variations selection criteria may be changed or switched. For example, the variation pattern is determined based on the first variation pattern selection criteria in the pattern variations before the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (up to 99 times), and the symbol when the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (100th time). A variation pattern may be determined based on the second variation pattern selection criteria in the variation. As a result, a specific variation pattern cannot be selected in the symbol variation before the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (up to 99 times), and a specific variation pattern is not selected in the symbol variation when the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (100th time). Variation patterns can be selected. In addition, while preparing the selection tendency of three or more variation patterns, the selection tendency is changed or switched multiple times (for example, twice) in the pattern variation in which the number of pattern variations after the special game is within a predetermined number (within 100 times). may

On the other hand, in pattern fluctuations in which the number of pattern fluctuations after the end of the special game exceeds a predetermined number (after 101 times), even if the selection tendency of the special pattern fluctuation pattern is not changed or switched midway according to the number of pattern fluctuations. good. In other words, in pattern variations where the number of symbol variations after the end of the special game exceeds a predetermined number (after 101 times), the variation pattern may be determined based on one variation pattern selection criterion regardless of the number of symbol variations. . In addition, even when the number of symbol variations after the end of the special game exceeds a predetermined number (after 101 times), the variation pattern selection criteria may be changed or switched according to the number of symbol variations. In this case, the number of changes in the selection tendency of the variation pattern in the pattern variation where the number of symbol variations after the end of the special game exceeds a predetermined number is the number of variation patterns in the pattern variation where the number of symbol variations after the end of the special game is within the predetermined number. It may be less than the number of changes in the selection tendency. For example, when the number of symbol variations is within a predetermined number, the selection tendency of the variation pattern is changed two or more times, whereas when the number of symbol variations exceeds the predetermined number, the selection tendency of the variation pattern is changed only once. It does not have to be.

In the present embodiment, it may be configured to shift to "high probability and high ball entry state" or "low probability and high ball entry state" after the end of the special game depending on the type of the jackpot symbol. That is, the transition probability to the probability change state after the big hit may be less than 100%. For example, when a special game is executed as a big hit with a big win pattern A or a big win pattern B, the special game is shifted to a high probability and high ball entry state after the special game, and a big win is made with a big win pattern C and the special game is executed. In some cases, the state may be shifted to a low probability and high ball entry state after the special game. Furthermore, when a special game is executed with a big win in the big win pattern A, the game state after the special game is shifted to a "probability change confirmation mode" in which the player is notified that the probability change state, When a special game is executed as a big win in the big win pattern B or the big win pattern C, the game state is shifted to a "secret mode" for concealing from the player whether or not the game state after the special game is in the probability fluctuation state. good too. In addition, it is assumed that the probability variation confirmation mode is not provided, and the game state after the special game is shifted to the "secret mode" for concealing from the player whether or not the probability variation state is the state of the game even if the jackpot pattern is a big hit. You may do so.

In this embodiment, depending on whether or not the game ball enters the specific area in the big winning opening opened in the special game after the big hit, after the special game, "high probability and high ball entry state" or "low It may be shifted to "probability and high ball entry state". In other words, only when the ball enters the specific area provided in the large winning opening during the special game, it is shifted to the "high probability and high ball entry state" after the special game, and the specific area provided in the large winning opening during the special game. If the player does not enter the ball, the state is shifted to "low probability and high ball entry state". In this case, irrespective of whether or not a ball enters a specific area in the big winning hole during the special game, a "secret mode" is set to conceal from the player whether or not the game state is in the probability change state after the special game. may be migrated. In addition, during the special game, the display such as "Aim for V!", which is aimed at entering the specific area in the big winning opening, is not displayed, and entering the specific area (V winning) shifts to the probability change state. It may be possible to more effectively conceal whether or not the

In this embodiment, the degree of expectation for a big hit and the degree of expectation for a big hit are determined in the pattern variation in which the number of symbol variations is within a predetermined number (1 to 100 times) and the symbol variation in which the number of symbol variations exceeds a predetermined number (101 times or later). The production tendency and occurrence frequency of the advance notice production and the look-ahead production (also collectively referred to as the expectation-suggestion production) suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit with probability variation may be varied. Here, the advance notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win is a effect in which the degree of expectation for a big win is executed during the change in the success/fail judgment of the win/fail lottery value corresponding to the change. On the other hand, the look-ahead effect suggesting the degree of expectation to be a big hit is the effect based on the result of prior determination of the success or failure lottery value reserved in the special figure reservation means 241, and the design in which the look-ahead success or failure lottery value is digested. It is a production that is executed before the start of fluctuation.

As an example of an expectation suggestive effect, a temporary stop display that makes it appear as if the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the pseudo continuous variable effect, and a temporary stop display of the pseudo-continuous dedicated symbol that suggests the content of the effect after the temporary stop in the temporary stop display. cases, etc. In addition, in the ready-to-reach fluctuation production accompanying the ready-to-reach mode of the decorative pattern, the pre-ready-to-reach notice executed at the timing before reaching the ready-to-reach mode and the post-reach notice to be executed after reaching the ready-to-reach mode can also correspond to the expectation degree suggesting production. . Specific examples of pre-reach notices and post-reach notices include a cut-in effect in which words suggesting expectations or character images are displayed for a relatively short period of time (about a few seconds), or entering or developing a state of higher expectations. It is a specific zone rush production that suggests to do. In these advance notice effects, a type of character corresponding to the degree of expectation may be displayed, or characters, window frames, and the like may be displayed in display colors corresponding to the degree of expectation. In addition, changing the background display, adding a belt-like display that indicates the zone during stay, and displaying an object image that suggests high expectations on the screen, etc. state) may be shown, or a role product actuation effect for activating the movable accessory 66 may be executed. In addition, when a decorative lamp is applied to the movable accessory 66, the movable accessory may be operated while being lit in a display color corresponding to the degree of expectation.

The expectation degree suggesting effect may be executed during a so-called super reach effect. Variation production accompanied by super reach production includes production before reach, production after reach, and development production after reach (so-called super reach production), and super reach production is composed of multiple stages of development production executed after reach. Sometimes. In addition, the expectation level suggesting effect may be executed in the pre-reach production and the post-reach production before developing to the super ready-to-win production, and the expectation level suggesting production may be executed in the development production after the ready-to-win production. The after-reach production may include a common production that is at least partially common to the production content executed in the so-called normal reach production, which is not a super reach production, and development to the next stage after the execution of the common production (that is, super It is also possible to produce an effect that raises expectations by executing a notice effect suggesting development to reach effect). When the development performance extends over a plurality of stages, the expectation level suggesting performance may be executed in at least one of the multiple stages, or the expectation level suggesting performance may be executed in two or more of the multiple stages or in each stage. A wide variety of super ready-to-win effects may be realized by preparing multiple types of development effects, varying the number of stages of the development effects, or changing the display order of the multiple types of development effects. For example, a reach-up effect may be executed in which the development effect after the reach is stepped up by continuously executing a plurality of types of development effects in order. Also, during the execution of the development effects of each stage, and at the timing between the development effects of each stage, even if the above-mentioned cut-in effects, temporary stop display of decorative symbols, temporary stop display of pseudo consecutive exclusive symbols, etc. are executed. good. In addition, in the variable effect accompanying the super reach effect, high-expectation display colors such as gold and giraffe patterns may be used as the display mode of the cut-in effect and the pseudo-continuous exclusive pattern.

The degree-of-expectation indication effect may be executed at a timing immediately before the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped. The expectation level suggesting effect executed immediately before the change is stopped may be an effect that definitely notifies the result of the change. It may be a specific operation effect that can be started with the input operation of . This specific operation effect is, for example, a role product actuation effect in which the movable accessory 66 is activated, and when the role product actuation effect is executed in a lighting color such as rainbow color, the win/loss result is accompanied by a big hit or a certainty. A big hit is definitely reported. On the other hand, if the performance is performed in lighting colors other than rainbow colors, such as white, blue, green, red, etc., it is suggested that there is a high degree of expectation that the winning result will be a big hit. It may be suggested that the lighting color of the role object in which the degree of expectation is activated increases in order of white, blue, green, and red, and in the case of these lighting colors other than rainbow color, the winning result is a big hit. It may be suggested that it is not certain that A display that prompts the player to perform an input operation (for example, display of a button image simulating an operation button, display of the words "Press!", etc.) and a specific operation effect that can be executed after that are performed under the situation where the pattern is in the ready-to-win mode. It may be executed, or it may be executed under a situation in which the symbols are temporarily stopped in a losing mode or a winning mode. When the specific operation performance is executed under the condition that the pattern is temporarily stopped in the missing mode, it may be a resurrection performance or a relief performance that gives a big win after making the player think that the game has failed. When the resurrection effect or relief effect is executed, the pattern in the temporarily stopped state may be accompanied by a pseudo-continuous change after that. In other words, when the specific operation effect is executed under the condition that the symbols are temporarily stopped in a disengaged state, a pseudo-continuous variation in which the symbols in the temporarily stopped state are changed again after that may be executed. Further, when the specific operation effect is executed under the condition that the games are temporarily stopped in the win mode, the promotion effect may be such that the game is promoted to a more advantageous type of jackpot. The promotion effect may be, for example, a promotion from a symbol type or symbol combination suggesting a big hit without a probability change to a symbol type or symbol combination suggesting a big hit with a probability change, or a real round of a special game shifted after the big hit. It may be promotion to a symbol type or symbol combination that suggests a higher number of jackpots. The specific operation performance may be a performance that does not involve the actuation of the movable accessory. The specific operation effect may be started according to the player's input operation, or may be started regardless of the player's input operation. The execution of the specific operation effect may be skipped when the player does not perform an input operation, or may be executed even when the player does not perform an input operation.

In addition, as an expectation level suggestion effect, the variable object change effect that changes the display mode of the variable object that suggests the jackpot expectation level related to the change, and the display mode of the pending object that suggests the jackpot expectation level related to the suspension is changed. There is a holding change effect that makes it possible. In this specification, both the change effect of the variable object and the change effect of the pending object may be collectively referred to as "suspended change effect". The variable object or pending object is a spherical object image displayed in the lower center portion of the screen. Reservation object is an object image for effectively showing the reservation number of the lottery value reserved by the special figure reservation means, and the same number of reservation number and spherical object images (reservation ball image) are displayed, and the reservation ball image The displayed number of indicates the pending number. The variable object is an object image having a display mode similar to or similar to that of the suspended object. displayed in different positions. The variable object and the pending object further suggest the degree of expectation for a big win related to the variable or pending by its display mode. For example, the display color of the display image of the variable object or the pending object, the display wording, the additional decorative display such as the aura image or the character image suggests the degree of expectation for the big win related to the variable or pending. In the hold change effect, the display of the object changes from a relatively low-expectation display mode to a high-expectation display mode, and depending on the change in the display mode and the display mode after the change, the expectation for the big hit related to the change or the hold is increased. suggested to be high.

In addition, as an expectation indication effect by prefetching, there is a chance effect that the decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed in the pattern change before the pattern change related to the prefetched lottery value are a combination of odd or even numbers or a combination of the same color patterns. be done. For example, chances of even numbered symbol combinations and chances of blue symbol combinations suggest low expectations, while chances of odd numbered symbol combinations and chances of red symbol combinations indicate high expectations. is suggested.

Such an expectation level suggesting effect may be executed, for example, with high frequency when the number of symbol fluctuations is within a predetermined number of symbol fluctuations, and with low frequency when the number of symbol fluctuations exceeds the predetermined number. Conversely, such advance notice effects and look-ahead effects, for example, are executed at a low frequency when the number of symbol fluctuations is within a predetermined number of symbol fluctuations, and are executed at a high frequency when the number of symbol fluctuations exceeds a predetermined number. good.

The frequency of execution of such an expectation degree suggesting effect may differ between when the specific variation pattern described above is selected and when it is not selected. For example, when the above-mentioned variation pattern for notification is selected, the forewarning effect and the look-ahead effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit are executed with low frequency or not at all, while the variation pattern for notification is not selected. In this case, the advance notice effect or the look-ahead effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit may be executed with a higher frequency than when the informing variation pattern is selected. Conversely, when the variation pattern for notification is selected, the advance notice effect and the look-ahead effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win are executed with high frequency, and when the variation pattern for notification is not selected, the degree of expectation for a big win. A notice effect or a prefetch effect suggesting that may be executed at a lower frequency than when the informing variation pattern is selected. Further, the execution frequency of the advance notice effect and the look-ahead effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit may be changed depending on whether the super-fast variation pattern is selected or not. For example, when the super-speed variation pattern is selected, the advance notice effect and the look-ahead effect suggesting the expectation of the big hit are executed at a low frequency, while when the super-speed variation pattern is not selected, the expectation of the big win is suggested. The advance notice effect and the look-ahead effect may be executed with high frequency. In addition, the execution frequency of the expectation level suggestion effect may be varied according to the selection tendency of the variation pattern, for example, the execution frequency of the expectation level suggestion effect when the variation pattern is determined based on the specific variation pattern selection criteria becomes relatively high and the variation pattern is determined based on another variation pattern selection criterion, the execution frequency of the expected suggestive effect may be relatively low.

After the end of the special game, the state is shifted to the probability fluctuation state and the easy-to-enter state, and the result of the winning/failure judgment is a big hit before the number of pattern fluctuations of the special pattern after the end of the special game reaches a predetermined number, or the state is changed to the normal probability state. In the case where the fall judgment is made to the effect that it will fall, the normal symbols start to fluctuate before the fluctuation of the special symbols indicating that it will be a big hit or before the fluctuation of the special symbols that starts to fluctuate after the judgment of the fall, When a normal symbol indicating that the operation determination result of the entering ball variation mechanism is a win is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, the entering ball variation mechanism is relatively long after the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. It may operate for one operating time. On the other hand, after the end of the special game, the state is shifted to the probability changing state and the easy-entering state, and the success/failure judgment is made after the number of pattern changes of the special symbols after the special game ends reaches a predetermined number in the state of the probability-changing state and the easy-entering state. If the result of is a big hit or if a fall judgment is made to the effect that it will fall to a normal probability state, the special symbols that will start changing before or after the fall judgment that indicates the big hit If the normal symbol starts to fluctuate before the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the normal symbol indicating that the result of the operation determination of the entry ball variation mechanism is a win is displayed while the special symbol is fluctuating, the normal symbol is stopped. After the display, the ball entry variation mechanism may operate for a second operating time shorter than the first operating time. That is, irrespective of the game state at the start of fluctuation of the normal symbols to be a hit, the game state at the time of stop display of the normal symbols is an easy-to-enter state or a normal-enter state. The operation time of the ball entry variation mechanism that operates after the stop display of the normal symbol may be different.

In this embodiment, when the first special symbol becomes a big hit and the special game is executed, the state is always shifted to the probability fluctuation state after the special game, and the second special symbol becomes a big hit and the special game is executed. If there is, it may be shifted to the probability change state without fail after the special game. That is, it may be a 100% variable probability configuration in which only variable probability big hits are prepared as the big hit types of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this configuration, the probability variation state with symbol variation exceeding a predetermined number (101 times or later) depending on whether or not a specific effect is executed in the symbol variation with which the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (100 times) Whether or not to continue may be definitely notified. For example, in response to the operation of the effect button 109, a notification effect may be executed to confirm that the probability fluctuation state will continue, and an image simulating the effect button 109 for prompting the player to operate the button may be displayed as the notification effect. A display prior to execution may deterministically suggest that the stochastic fluctuation state continues. In other words, when the fall judgment is made to the effect that it falls to the normal probability state before the number of symbol fluctuations reaches the predetermined number (100 times), and the symbol fluctuation when the number of symbol fluctuations reaches the predetermined number (100 times) is out. In addition, the display of the image simulating the effect button 109 may not be performed with the predetermined number of symbol variations. In addition, even if the fall judgment is made to the effect that the number of symbol fluctuations falls to the normal probability state before the number of symbol variations reaches the predetermined number (100 times), the symbol variation that the number of symbol variations reaches the predetermined number (100 times) In the case of a big win, an image simulating the performance button 109 is displayed with the predetermined number of pattern variations, and after the performance button 109 is operated, the notification performance of confirming the big win may be executed.

In the configuration in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are 100% probability variation, a plurality of production modes with different production tendencies at the time of pattern fluctuation are prepared, and one of the plurality of production modes can be selected according to the operation of the player. may be configured to Depending on which one of the plurality of production modes is selected, the production tendency and execution frequency of the above-described expectation level suggestive production may differ. For example, three production modes A, B, and C are prepared. The suggestion frequency may be lowered. In the case of the performance mode A, the expectation degree suggesting performance suggesting the big win is executed with high frequency at the time of pattern variation leading to the big win or when the lottery value corresponding to the big win is reserved. On the other hand, in the case of the performance mode C, the expectation degree suggesting performance suggesting a big win is hardly executed or not executed at all even when the pattern changes to become a big win or when the lottery value corresponding to the big win is reserved. . In the production mode B, a balanced production positioned between the production modes A and C is executed.

In this embodiment, when the first special symbol becomes a big hit and the special game is executed, the state is shifted to the probability fluctuation state or the normal probability state after the special game, while the second special symbol becomes a big hit and the special game is played. is executed, it may be shifted to the probability variation state without fail after the special game. In this case, it may be determined whether or not to shift to the probability change state depending on whether or not the game ball enters the specific area in the big winning opening opened during the special game after the big hit. That is, it may be a configuration called "ball definite" or "V definite" in which the transition to the probability variable state is confirmed by entering a specific area (V winning) during the special game. As the big winning openings that can be opened during the special game, a first big winning opening having no specific area inside the big winning opening and a second big winning opening having a specific area inside the big winning opening are provided. A first unit game in which the first big winning opening is opened and a second unit game in which the second big winning opening is opened may be executed during the special game of the round. In this case, it is possible to execute a second unit game in which the opening mode and the opening time of the second big prize opening are different depending on the type of the big winning pattern, and it is possible to execute a second unit game in which the easiness of entering the specific area is different. In this way, the probability of transition to the probability variation state may differ according to the type of the jackpot symbol. For example, when a special game is executed as a result of a big win with a big win pattern A, a second unit game in which the opening time of the second big prize opening is relatively long is executed to facilitate entry of a ball into a specific area. You may do so. On the other hand, when a special game is executed as a big win with the big win pattern B, a second unit game is executed in which the opening time of the second big prize opening is relatively short, and it is difficult to enter the specific area. You can make it In addition, by varying the opening timing of the big winning hole and the operation timing of a distribution mechanism for allocating game balls to either a specific area or a non-specific area in the big winning hole according to the type of the big winning pattern, A special game (jackpot symbol A) in which it is easy or possible to enter a specific area or a special game (jackpot symbol B) in which it is difficult or impossible to enter a special area may be executed. In addition, only a large winning opening with a specific area is provided, and a distribution mechanism for distributing game balls to either the specific area or the non-specific area in a specific number of unit games (for example, the 4th round) is operated. , a special game that makes it easier or possible to enter a specific area by changing the operation mode according to the type of the jackpot pattern (jackpot pattern A, the allocation time value that allows the ball to enter the specific area is 10) seconds) and a special game in which it is difficult or impossible to enter the specific area (jackpot pattern B, allocation time value that allows the ball to enter the specific area is 0.05 seconds). good.

In the configuration of the above-mentioned "V definite", the execution mode of the second unit game when the first special symbol becomes a big hit and the special game is executed, and the second special symbol becomes a big hit and the special game is executed. The transition probability to the probability change state may be made different by making the execution mode of the second unit game different. For example, when the first special symbol is a big hit and the special game is executed, the opening time of the second big winning hole in the second unit game is relatively shortened, and the ball entering the specific area is relatively shortened. On the other hand, when the second special pattern is a big hit and the special game is executed, the opening time of the second big winning port in the second unit game is relatively lengthened to allow the player to access the specific area. You may make it relatively easy to enter a ball. As a specific example, when the first special symbol is a big hit and the special game is executed, the probability of entering a specific area in the second big winning hole is set to about 50%, while the second special symbol is set to about 50%. The probability of a ball entering the second big winning hole when the symbol is a big hit and the special game is executed may be about 80%. In addition, when the second special symbol is a big hit and the special game is executed, the opening time of the second big winning opening in the second unit game is lengthened (for example, 5 seconds or more, 10 seconds or more, or 20 seconds or more). by doing,
The second unit game may be configured such that if the game ball is shot toward the second big winning hole during the special game, the ball almost certainly enters the second big winning hole. Thereby, when the second special symbol is a big hit and the special game is executed, the probability of the ball entering the specific area in the second big winning hole may be substantially 100%. In other words, the probability of transition to the probability change state when the second special symbol becomes a big hit may be substantially 100%. In this case, the probability of transition to the probability variation state when the first special symbol is a big hit may be less than 100%, and the probability of transition to the probability variation state when the first special symbol is a big hit is 50%. It may be up to about 80%. That is, in the configuration of "V definite", the special figure 1 may be less than 100% probability variation and the special figure 2 may be 100% probability variation.

In a configuration in which the special figure 1 is less than 100% probability variation and the special figure 2 is 100% probability variation, a plurality of production modes with different production tendencies at the time of pattern fluctuation during normal play are prepared, and a plurality of production modes are prepared according to the operation of the player. It may be configured to be able to select one of the production modes. As a production mode, a common production is executed with pattern fluctuations until the number of pattern fluctuations after the end of the special game reaches a specific number (for example, 20 times), and a pattern fluctuation that exceeds the specific number (for example, after 21 times) mutually A plurality of specific effect modes in which different effects can be executed may be prepared. Furthermore, a special effect mode different from the plurality of specific effect modes may be prepared. In the special effect mode, an effect different from the above-described common effect may be executed until the number of symbol changes reaches a specific number (for example, 20 times) after the end of the special game. Furthermore, it may be configured such that the player can select any one of a plurality of characters within the same presentation mode, and the content of presentation may differ according to the selected character.

In the configuration where the special figure 1 is less than 100% probability variation and the special figure 2 is 100% probability variation, the number of times of symbol variation is a predetermined number (100 times). You may change the production|presentation tendency of a continuous production|presentation according to the production|presentation mode. For example, in the first production mode, a notification production for deterministically informing whether or not the probability fluctuation state can be continued is executed, while in the second production mode, an expectation degree suggesting production that suggests the degree of expectation for the continuation of the probability fluctuation state is executed. You may do so. Depending on the performance mode, the performance tendency of the variation performance executed in the pattern variation when the symbol variation frequency exceeds a predetermined number (after 101 times) may be varied. In this case, in the production mode, the variation performance executed in the pattern variation with the number of symbol variations within a predetermined number and the variation performance performed in the pattern variation performance with the number of symbol variations exceeding the predetermined number are the same in the production mode. They are common and may differ in different production modes. In addition, when the number of symbol variations exceeds a predetermined number (101 times or later), the number of symbol variations becomes a big hit, or when a fall judgment is made to the effect that it falls to the normal probability state, the number of symbol variations is a predetermined number (100 times). The same effect as the variation effect (that is, the notification effect or the expectation level suggesting effect) executed in the symbol variation may be executed. In this case, when the number of symbol variations exceeds a predetermined number (after 101 times), the number of symbol variations becomes a big hit, or when the fall judgment is made to the effect that it falls to the normal probability state, and the symbol variation is a predetermined number. (100 times) The variation performance executed in the pattern variation is common in the same performance mode, and may be different in different performance modes.

In the configuration where the special figure 1 is less than 100% probability variation and the special figure 2 is 100% probability variation, it is determined whether the pattern variation falls to the normal probability state before the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (100 times). A suggesting fall effect may be executed. This falling effect may be a battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character battle, and the degree of expectation is suggested according to the battle result, and the character is defeated in the battle before the number of symbol changes reaches a predetermined number (100 times). Falling to the normal probability state may be suggested when the defeat effect is executed. Note that a resurrection effect may be executed to suggest the possibility that the ally character will be resurrected after the battle is defeated, and execution of the resurrection effect may suggest that the probability fluctuation state may continue. On the other hand, when the resurrection effect is not executed before the number of symbol changes after the battle defeat reaches a specific number (for example, 5 times, 10 times), it may be definitely notified that the player has fallen to the normal probability state. A defeat effect or a resurrection effect may be executed a plurality of times before the number of symbol changes reaches a predetermined number (100 times). may be executed.

In this embodiment, when the first special symbol becomes a big hit and the special game is executed, the state is shifted to the probability fluctuation state or the normal probability state after the special game, and the second special symbol becomes a big hit and the special game is played. is executed, it may be shifted to the probability variation state or the normal probability state after the special game. In other words, it may be a configuration of probability variation less than 100% in which a probability variation jackpot and a non-probability variation jackpot are prepared as the jackpot types of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, the probability of transitioning to the probability fluctuation state after the special game is executed as a big hit may be common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 2 is better than the special figure 1. It can be expensive. For example, in the configuration of "V certainty" described above, the probability of shifting to the probability change state after the special figure 1 becomes a big hit is 50%, and the probability that the special figure 2 becomes a big hit and shifts to the probability change state may be 80%. In this configuration, the probability variation state with symbol variation exceeding a predetermined number (101 times or later) depending on whether or not a specific effect is executed in the symbol variation with which the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (100 times) may suggest the degree of expectation that continues. For example, depending on the operation of the production button 109, a specific operation production that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability fluctuation state will continue may be executed, and the number of times of pattern fluctuation is a predetermined number (100 times). 2 times), and a high degree of expectation that the probability change state will continue may be suggested according to the suggested content of the specific operation presentation a plurality of times. In this case, a notification effect may be executed to confirm that the probability change state continues in any of the plurality of specific operation effects, or the probability change state continues in any of the plurality of specific operation effects. It does not have to be reported definite. In the latter case, it may be suggested that the probability that the stochastic fluctuation state will continue is relatively low.

In the configuration where the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are less than 100% probability variation, the number of symbol variations after the special game becomes a predetermined number (100th) according to the effect content at the time of the symbol variation, the number of symbol variations is a predetermined number. It may be suggested whether or not the fall determination to the effect of falling is made within (1 time to 100 times) of the pattern variation. For example, even if the possibility of whether or not it has already fallen depending on whether the battle production in the pattern variation where the number of symbol variations is a predetermined number (100th) is victory, battle continuation, or defeat good. For example, when the battle is won, it may be impossible to determine whether or not the player has already fallen, but it may be suggested that a big hit will occur in the symbol variation when the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (the 100th time). . If the battle continues, it may be suggested that the fall determination to the effect that the player is to fall has not been made. If the player is defeated in the battle, it may be suggested that the game state has fallen to the normal probability state because the fall determination has already been made to the effect that the player will fall. In this configuration, when the probability fluctuation state and the easy-to-enter state continue in pattern fluctuations in which the number of pattern fluctuations after the special game exceeds a predetermined number (after 101 times), the selection tendency of the fluctuation pattern in the pattern fluctuations exceeding the predetermined number may be changed. For example, the variation pattern selection criteria may be changed to allow selection of ultra-fast variation patterns with extremely short variation times, and the variation efficiency of pattern variations exceeding a predetermined number (101 times or later) may be further enhanced.

(Example 2: limit type)
In this embodiment, an upper limit (limit) is provided for the number of consecutive occurrences of probability variable jackpots that can shift to the probability variable state after the end of the special game (so-called number of consecutive games). If the probability variation jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed in the probability fluctuation state, and if the probability variation jackpot pattern that does not trigger the limit is stopped and displayed (that is, before the limit is reached), after the probability variation jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed After the end of the special game to be executed, the state is shifted to the probability variation state. On the other hand, when the probability variable jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed in the probability fluctuation state, and when the probability variable jackpot pattern that triggers the limit reaching is stopped and displayed (that is, after the limit is reached), the probability variable jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed. After the end of the special game to be executed later, the state is shifted to the normal probability state. The upper limit number of times that the limit is reached is set for the cumulative number of times that the probability variable jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed during the probability variable continuation from the transition from the normal probability state to the probability fluctuation state to the next transition to the normal probability state. The limit is reached when the cumulative number of times that the variable probability big hit symbol is stopped and displayed during the continuation of the variable probability reaches a predetermined number (for example, 6 times). When the limit is reached, that is, when the cumulative number of stop displays of the variable probability big hit symbols during the continuation of the variable probability becomes a predetermined number (for example, 6 times), it is executed after the stop display of the variable probability big hit symbols with the cumulative number of times becoming a predetermined number. After the end of the special game, the state is forcibly shifted to the normal probability state. On the other hand, if the cumulative number of stop-displayed probability variable jackpot symbols during the probability variable continuation is less than a predetermined number (for example, 5 times or less), the limit is not reached. If the limit has not been reached, that is, if the cumulative number of stop displays of the probability variable big hit symbols during the probability variable continuation is less than a predetermined number (for example, 5 times or less), the stop display of the probability variable big hit symbols whose cumulative number is less than the predetermined number After the end of the special game to be executed later, the state is shifted to the probability variation state. It should be noted that when the state is shifted to the normal probability state, the count of the accumulated number of probability variable jackpot symbols related to the limit is reset. An example of the jackpot probability in this embodiment is about 1/120 to 1/160 in the normal probability state (low probability state) and about 1/30 to 1/40 in the probability variation state (high probability state).

In this embodiment, when the state is changed to the probability change state after the special game is finished, the state is changed to the probability change state and the ball entry easy state. Therefore, in the probability fluctuation state, the game ball is entered toward the second starting port 12 where the ease of entering the ball is increased, and the second special symbol becomes a big hit. At this time, only the probability variation jackpot is prepared as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, and the special figure 2 may be configured to be 100% probability variation. In this case, when the normal probability state is shifted to the probability variable state, the state is always shifted to the probability variable state after executing the special game until the limit is reached, and when the limit is reached, the state is always shifted to the normal probability state after the special game is executed. becomes. As a result, the continuation of the probability fluctuation state is guaranteed up to the upper limit number that reaches the limit. In the limit type, while the probability fluctuation state continues until the next big win, the end of the easy-to-enter state may be set a predetermined number of times. As a result, when the end of the easy-to-enter state is reached, the probability change state (high probability) and normal entry state (low sphere).

In this embodiment, a variable probability big hit and a non-variable probability big hit may be prepared as the jackpot types of the second special symbol, and the special figure 2 may be configured to be less than 100% probability variation. For example, as the types of symbols indicating that the second special symbol is a big hit, a variable probability big winning symbol (first big winning symbol) and a non-variable big winning symbol (second big winning symbol) are prepared, and the first big winning symbol is stopped and displayed. After the special game to be executed later ends, the transition to the probability variation state is possible, and after the special game to be executed after the stop display of the second jackpot symbol is ended, the normal probability state may be possible. In this case, when the first big win symbol that triggers reaching the limit is stopped and displayed, the normal probability state is entered after the special game, while when the first big win symbol is stopped and displayed before the limit is reached, the special After playing the game, the state is shifted to the probability variation state. In other words, when the cumulative number of stop-displayed first jackpot symbols reaches a predetermined number during the continuation of the probability variation from the normal probability state to the probability variable state until the next normal probability state, the cumulative number of times. reaches a predetermined number (reaches a limit), after the special game executed after the stop display of the first jackpot symbol is completed, the state is shifted to the normal probability state. On the other hand, if the cumulative number of stop-displayed first jackpot symbols is less than the predetermined number while the probability variation continues, the first jackpot symbol whose cumulative count is less than the predetermined number (before the limit is reached) is executed after stop-display. After the end of the special game played, the state is shifted to the probability variation state. When the second big win symbol is stop-displayed during the continuation of the variable probability, the state is shifted to the normal probability state regardless of the accumulated number of stop-display of the first big win symbol until then. Therefore, after the limit is reached, the state is always shifted to the normal probability state after the special game is executed.

In the configuration where special figure 2 is less than 100% probability variation, the probability variation transition probability of special figure 1 and special figure 2 may be the same. That is, the probability that the first special symbol is a big hit and the transition to the probability change state after the special game is executed, and the probability that the second special symbol is the big hit and the transition to the probability change state after the special game is executed are performed. may be the same as the probability that In this case, there are a first probability variable jackpot symbol and a first non-probability variable jackpot symbol as the types of symbols indicating that the first special symbol is a big hit, and a second special symbol as a symbol type indicating that the second special symbol is a jackpot. There may be a 2 probability variable jackpot pattern and a second non-probability variable jackpot pattern.

In the configuration where the special figure 2 is less than 100% probability variation, the probability variation transition probability of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be different. For example, the probability variation transition probability of special figure 1 may be 50% and the probability variation transition probability of special figure 2 may be 80%. In this case, the configuration of "V definite" described in the first embodiment may be used. For example, in the case of a big hit in special figure 1, a second unit game is included in which it is difficult to enter the specific area by opening the second big winning hole in which the specific area is provided for a relatively short time. A special game may be made executable, and the probability variation transition probability may be relatively low. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the special figure 2, a second unit game is included in which the second big winning hole provided with the specific area is opened for a relatively long time so that the ball can easily enter the specific area. A special game may be made executable, and the probability variation transition probability may be made relatively high.

In this embodiment, the fall determination described in the first embodiment may be combined. For example, the probability variation transition probability of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is 100%, and the fall determination that determines whether to shift to the normal probability state for each pattern variation after being shifted to the probability variation state may be made. . In this configuration, after the transition from the normal probability state to the probability variation state, if the cumulative number of hits reaches the predetermined number without making a fall judgment to the effect that the player falls to the normal probability state, the cumulative number of times reaches the predetermined number. After the end of the special game executed after the stop display of the jackpot symbols reaching the number, the state is shifted to the normal probability state. When the fall judgment to the effect of falling to the normal probability state is made in the probability fluctuation state, regardless of the accumulated number of times that the jackpot pattern (variable probability jackpot pattern) has been stopped and displayed, the pattern fluctuation related to the fall judgment is started. , the normal probability state is entered. In addition, in the configuration in which the limit and the fall are combined, the probability variation transition probability of at least one of the special figures 1 and 2 may be less than 100%. In the specification that combines the limit and the fall (limit and fall type), the probability change state will continue until the next big hit is made or the fall judgment is made, while the easy-to-enter state is set to the end of a predetermined number of times. there is something As a result, when the end of the easy-to-enter state is reached without a fall judgment to the effect that it will fall, the probability change state (high probability) and normal entry state (low entry ball).

In a configuration where the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are 100% probability variation and the limit and the fall are combined, it may be possible to shift to the easy ball entry state after the special game is executed after the special figure 1 becomes a big hit. . For example, after a special game is executed as a big hit (so-called first hit) in the special figure 1 in the normal ball entry state, the transition to the easy ball entry state may be made without fail. The conditions for continuation of the easy-ball-entry state may differ accordingly. For example, when the special figure 1 becomes a big hit in the normal entry state, the number of symbol fluctuations at the end of the easy entry state is relatively small (for example, 1 time, 9 times, etc.) , 18 times) There may be a jackpot pattern A and a jackpot pattern B with a relatively large number of pattern fluctuations (for example, 100 times), which is the end of the easy-to-enter state. The jackpot pattern A is a plurality of types of jackpot patterns (for example, jackpot pattern A1, jackpot pattern A2, jackpot pattern) corresponding to a plurality of pattern fluctuation times (for example, 1 time, 9 times, 18 times) at the end of the easy-to-enter state. A3) is preferred. When the special figure 2 becomes a big hit in the easy-to-enter state, the number of pattern fluctuations in the final period is relatively large (for example, 100 times, or continues until the next big hit). For example, after the first hit in the special figure 1 in the normal entry state, the number of pattern fluctuations that will be the final stage is relatively small (for example, 1 time, 9 times, 18 times). If the special figure 2 hits a big hit before the end of the easy-ball state, the state is shifted to the easy-ball-entering state in which the number of pattern fluctuations is relatively large (at least 100 times). When special figure 1 or special figure 2 becomes a big hit and the number of pattern fluctuations at the end is relatively large (for example, 100 times) When it shifts to an easy-to-enter state, then it falls from the probability fluctuation state to the normal probability state. The easy ball entry state may be continued until a fall determination is made to the effect that the ball is allowed to enter. That is, as described in the above-described first embodiment, the falling down is not performed until the predetermined number of symbol variations that can be the end of the easy-to-enter state is performed, and after that, the number of symbol variations is reached. In the case where a fall is made with a pattern change exceeding a predetermined number (for example, after 101 times), when the pattern change related to the fall determination is started, a high probability and a low probability from a high ball entry state. And it may be shifted to a low ball entry state. In addition, when the special figure 1 or special figure 2 hits the jackpot and reaches the limit, and when the number of pattern fluctuations at the end is relatively large (for example, 100 times) When the transition is made to the easy-to-enter state, It may be shifted to a low-probability and high-ball-entering state in which the number of symbol fluctuations, which is the end of the easy-ball-entering state, is fixed. That is, after the end of the special game executed after the stop-display of the jackpot symbol that triggers reaching the limit, the end of the easy-to-ball-enter state may be shifted to a low-probability, high-ball-entering state of 100 times. .

Special figure 1 and special figure 2 are 100% probability variation, and in a configuration in which limit and fall are combined, when special figure 1 hits a big hit (so-called first hit) in a normal ball state, the special figure 1 jackpot pattern Depending on the type, the transition may be made to an easy-to-enter state or a normal-to-enter state in which the number of symbol fluctuations at the end is relatively small (for example, 1 time, 9 times, or 18 times). As another example, when the special figure 1 hits (so-called first hit) in the normal entering state, the number of pattern fluctuations that will be the final stage is relatively high depending on the type of the special figure 1 jackpot pattern (for example, 100 times or continue until the next big hit), or a normal ball-entering state (a state that is not an easy-entering state). As another example, when the special figure 1 hits (so-called first hit) in the normal entry state, the number of pattern fluctuations that will be the final stage is relatively high depending on the type of the special figure 1 jackpot pattern ( For example, it may be shifted to an easy-to-enter state (continuing 100 times or until the next big hit) or an easy-to-enter state in which the number of pattern fluctuations at the end is relatively small (for example, 1 time, 9 times, or 18 times).

In the present embodiment, the degree of expectation for transitioning to the easy-to-enter state may be suggested by the performance during the pattern variation in which the special figure 1 is a big hit (so-called first hit) in the normal entering state. If the type of the jackpot pattern determines whether or not the transition to the easy-to-enter state is possible, depending on the content of the effect displayed on the effect display device during the pattern change related to the big win, when the pattern change related to the big win stops Possibilities of which types of jackpot symbols will be different may be different. For example, there are at least a first jackpot pattern (jackpot pattern C) and a second jackpot pattern (jackpot pattern D) as the types of special figure 1 jackpot patterns. After the end of the special game executed after the stop display of the jackpot pattern C), it is possible to shift to the easy-to-enter state, and it is executed after the stop display of the second jackpot pattern (jackpot pattern D) in the normal probability state and the normal ball-entry state. In the case of shifting to the normal ball-entering state after the end of the special game to be played, according to the contents of the effect during the pattern fluctuation in which the special figure 1 is a big hit, the first jackpot pattern (jackpot pattern C) and the second jackpot pattern are displayed in the pattern fluctuation. Possibilities as to which one of the two big-hit symbols (big-hit symbol D) is stop-displayed may be different. The expectation level suggesting effect described in the first embodiment may be executed as the effect suggesting the level of expectation for the possibility of transition to the easy-to-ball state. Depending on , the possibility of which of the first jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol C) and the second jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol D) is stopped and displayed may differ. In addition, depending on the contents of the look-ahead effect executed during the pattern variation before the pattern variation related to the big hit by using the look-ahead result of the winning lottery value related to the big hit Therefore, the possibility of which one of the first big-hit symbol (big-hit symbol C) and the second big-hit symbol (big-hit symbol D) is stop-displayed may be different. The look-ahead effect executed in this case may be the expectation level suggesting effect described in the first embodiment.

In the present embodiment, according to the effect during the pattern variation in which the special figure 1 is a big hit in the normal ball entry state, the number of symbol variations that will be the final stage is relatively large (or continues until the next big hit) Easy to enter An expectation to transition to the state may be suggested. For example, there are at least a first jackpot pattern (jackpot pattern E) and a second jackpot pattern (jackpot pattern F) as the types of jackpot patterns in special figure 1, and the first jackpot pattern (jackpot pattern) in a normal probability state and a normal ball state After the special game executed after the stop display of the jackpot pattern E), it is possible to shift to an easy-to-enter state with a relatively large number of pattern fluctuations (or continue until the next jackpot), which is the end of the special game, and a normal probability state and The number of pattern fluctuations, which is the final stage after the end of the special game executed after the stop display of the second jackpot pattern (jackpot pattern F) in the normal ball entry state, is relatively small (or it does not continue until the next jackpot) Easy ball entry In the case of shifting to the state, according to the contents of the effect during the pattern fluctuation in which the special figure 1 is a big hit, the first big hit pattern (big hit pattern E) and the second big hit pattern (big hit pattern F) are displayed in the pattern fluctuation. The possibilities of which ones are statically displayed may differ. As an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of the possibility of shifting to the easy-to-enter state in which the number of symbol changes in the final stage is relatively large (or continues until the next big hit), the expectation degree suggesting effect described in the above-described Embodiment 1 is used. may be executed, and either the first jackpot pattern (jackpot pattern E) or the second jackpot pattern (jackpot pattern F) is stopped and displayed according to the level of expectation indicated by the expectation indication effect. or may differ. In addition, depending on the contents of the look-ahead effect executed during the pattern variation before the pattern variation related to the big hit by using the look-ahead result of the winning lottery value related to the big hit Therefore, the possibility of which one of the first big-hit symbol (big-hit symbol E) and the second big-hit symbol (big-hit symbol F) is stop-displayed may be different. The look-ahead effect executed in this case may be the expectation level suggesting effect described in the first embodiment.

In the present embodiment, when the transition is made to the easy-to-enter state after a special game is executed with a high probability and a low-incoming ball state, depending on whether or not the big win reaches the limit, after that, The end of the easy-entry state to be transitioned to may be different. In other words, when a specific jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed with a high probability and a low ball entry state, the cumulative number of times the variable probability jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed during the continuation of the variable probability reaches a predetermined number (for example, 6 times). Depending on whether or not it is displayed, the ending period of the easy-ball-entry state to be shifted after that may differ. For example, when a specific jackpot pattern results in a jackpot and does not reach the limit, the state is shifted to a high probability and high ball entry state after the execution of the special game after the jackpot, and a high probability and high ball entry state. The state may continue until the next jackpot. On the other hand, when the jackpot is achieved with the same specific jackpot pattern and the limit is reached, the state is shifted to a low-probability and high-ball-entry state after the execution of the special game after the jackpot, and the high-ball-entry state is reached. A predetermined number of symbol changes (for example, 100 times) may be set as the end period. In other words, if a specific jackpot pattern hits the jackpot and reaches the limit, and the state is shifted to a low probability and high ball entry state after the end of the special game, the number of times of pattern fluctuation after the end of the special game is 100 times. The easy-ball state continues, and the normal ball-entering state occurs when the number of symbol variations reaches 101 after the end of the special game. The transition timing from the easy-entering state to the normal-entering state at this time may be triggered by the start of the 100th symbol variation, may be triggered by the end of the 100th symbol variation, or may be triggered by the 101st symbol. It may be just before the start of fluctuation.

In the present embodiment, when the transition to the easy-to-ball-entering state is made after a special game is executed with a high probability and a high-ball-entering state, depending on whether or not the big win reaches the limit, after that, The end of the easy-entry state to be transitioned to may be different. In other words, when a specific jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed with a high probability and a high ball entry state, the cumulative number of times the variable probability jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed during the continuation of the variable probability reaches a predetermined number (for example, 6 times). Depending on whether or not it is displayed, the ending period of the easy-ball-entry state to be shifted after that may differ. For example, when a specific jackpot pattern results in a jackpot and does not reach the limit, the state is shifted to a high probability and high ball entry state after the execution of the special game after the jackpot, and a high probability and high ball entry state. The state may continue until the next jackpot. On the other hand, when the jackpot is achieved with the same specific jackpot pattern and the limit is reached, the state is shifted to a low-probability and high-ball-entry state after the execution of the special game after the jackpot, and the high-ball-entry state is reached. A predetermined number of symbol changes (for example, 100 times) may be set as the end period. In other words, if a specific jackpot pattern hits the jackpot and reaches the limit, and the state is shifted to a low probability and high ball entry state after the end of the special game, the number of times of pattern fluctuation after the end of the special game is 100 times. The easy-ball state continues, and the normal ball-entering state occurs when the number of symbol variations reaches 101 after the end of the special game. The transition timing from the easy-entering state to the normal-entering state at this time may be triggered by the start of the 100th symbol variation, may be triggered by the end of the 100th symbol variation, or may be triggered by the 101st symbol. It may be just before the start of fluctuation.

In a configuration in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are 100% probability variation and the limit and the fall are combined, when the probability change state and the easy-to-enter state are shifted after the special game is finished, the state is made to fall to the normal probability state after that. A specific performance mode may be prepared which becomes a common performance tendency regardless of the number of symbol fluctuations in which the falling determination is made. Furthermore, as long as the easy-to-ball-enter state continues, regardless of whether the probability variation state continues or whether the state is shifted to the normal probability state due to the fall determination, there is a specific performance mode that has a common performance tendency. may be provided. After the end of the special game, when the state is shifted to the probability fluctuation state and the easy-to-enter state to enter a specific production mode, a rush production is executed to indicate that the specific production mode will be entered in the special game end demo. may In the special game ending demonstration, the rush effect may be executable in a plurality of display modes, and the difference in the display mode of the rush effect may suggest the continuation condition of the subsequent easy-to-enter state. For example, a plurality of pattern fluctuation times (for example, 1 time, 9 times, 18 times, 100 times, and continuing until the next big hit) that can be the end of the easy-to-enter state when entering a specific production mode are prepared, and easy-to-enter. The degree of expectation as to which state will end may be suggested by the display mode of the rush effect. For example, when the final number of times in the easy-to-ball state is 1 time, 9 times or 18 times, a rush effect is displayed in which the wording "Enter the effect mode A!" is displayed, and the display color of the wording. It may be possible to suggest which is the final number of easy-ball-entering states. For example, there may be blue letters and red letters as wordings for the entry effect, and the probability that the final number of times of the easy-to-ball state will be 18 may be higher for the red letters than for the blue letters. On the other hand, when the final number of easy-ball-entering states reaches 100, or when the easy-ball-entering state continues until the next big win, a rush effect is displayed in which the words "entering the effect mode B!!!" are displayed. The presence or absence of the end of the easy-ball-entering state may be suggested by the display color of the wording. For example, there may be blue letters and red letters as wordings for rush effect, and the possibility that the easy-to-ball-enter state will continue until the next big hit may be higher for the red letters than for the blue letters. Further, a continuous effect may be executed to incite whether or not the easy-to-enter state will continue in the number of symbol fluctuations (for example, 1 time, 9 times or 18 times) that can be the end of the easy-to-enter state. For example, if it is the first pattern change, it is possible to execute a continuous effect that incites whether the easy-to-enter state (that is, the effect mode A) ends in one time or continues 9 times or more, and the 9th pattern change. If so, it is possible to execute a continuous effect that encourages whether the easy-to-enter state (that is, effect mode A) ends after nine times or continues for 18 times or more. Also, if it is the 18th symbol change, does the easy-to-enter state end at 18 times and the production mode A ends, or does it enter into the production mode B and the easy-to-enter state continues for 100 times or more? It is possible to execute a continuous production that incites Furthermore, depending on the difference in the display mode of the continuous effect executed for the pattern fluctuation number of times (for example, 1 time, 9 times or 18 times) that can be the end of the easy-entering state, the continuation expectation of the easy-entering state (that is, The possibility of which stage of the easy entry state will be) may be suggested. Further, whether or not the current game state is the probability fluctuating state may be suggested by the difference in the display mode of the continuous effect. In other words, it may be suggested whether or not the falling determination to the effect of falling to the normal probability state has already been made by the difference in the display mode of the continuous effect.

In this embodiment, it may be possible to notify the remaining number of probability variable jackpots until the limit is reached. For example, when the cumulative number of hits during the probability variation continuation from the normal probability state to the probability fluctuation state until the next transition to the normal probability state is limited to a predetermined number (for example, 16 times), the probability variation continuation The number of times (for example, 14 times) obtained by subtracting the current accumulated number of times (for example, 2 times) of the jackpot from a predetermined number (for example, 16 times) can be reported as the remaining number of times. In this case, immediately after the transition from the normal probability state to the probability variation state, a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 16 times) is reported as the remaining number of times, and immediately before the occurrence of the jackpot when the cumulative number of times reaching the limit reaches the predetermined number, the remaining number is reached. The number of times becomes 1. The remaining number of times until the limit is reached may be notified during the pattern fluctuation during the normal game, may be always displayed on the effect display device during the normal game, or the player presses the effect button during the normal game. It may be displayed by operating. In addition, it may be possible to notify during execution of the special game, it may be always displayed on the effect display device during the special game, or it may be displayed by the player operating the effect button during the special game. good too. The remaining number of times until the limit is reached may be notified only in a specific game state, for example, it may be notified in the easy-to-enter state, but may not be notified in the normal-entered state. For example, in the configuration in which the above-mentioned limit and fall are combined, the remaining number of times until reaching the limit can be notified in a specific production mode that enters when the probability fluctuation state and easy ball entry state are entered after the end of the special game. may In addition, when the transition to the probability fluctuation state and the easy-to-enter state occurs after the end of the special game, the limit is reached when the number of pattern fluctuations at the end of the easy-to-enter state is relatively large (for example, at least 100 times). It may be possible to notify the remaining number of times up to. As another example, it may be possible to report the remaining number of times until the limit is reached when the state is changed to the probability fluctuation state and the easy-to-enter state after the end of the special game executed with the special figure 2 as a big hit. The notification of the remaining number of times until the limit is reached may be made so as to be vague enough to suggest whether the remaining number of times is large or small, instead of definite or explicit notification of the remaining number of times. For example, if a red mark is displayed, there is a high possibility that the remaining number of times is relatively high (e.g., 8 to 16 times), and if a blue mark is displayed, the remaining number of times is relatively low (e.g., 0 to 7 times).

In this embodiment, instead of the remaining number of times until the limit is reached, whether or not the accumulated number of times reaches a predetermined number (reaches the limit) in the next big hit may be notified. In other words, when the remaining number of times until the limit is reached is 1, it is notified that the limit is about to be reached, and when the remaining number of times until the limit is reached is 2 or more, it is notified that the limit is not immediately reached. You may The notification of whether or not it is immediately before the limit is reached may be notified during the pattern fluctuation during the normal game, similarly to the notification of the remaining number of times until the limit is reached, and may be notified during the special game. Alternatively, notification may be possible only in a specific game state. Specifically, it may be configured such that it is possible to notify whether or not it is immediately before the limit is reached in the easy-entering state, while it is not notified whether or not it is immediately before the limit is reached in the normal-entering state. Further, rather than definitively or explicitly notifying whether or not it is immediately before the limit is reached, it may be possible to vaguely suggest whether or not there is a high possibility that it is immediately before the limit is reached. For example, if a red mark is displayed, there is a high possibility that it is not just before reaching the limit, and if a blue mark is displayed, it may be suggested that there is a high possibility that it is just before reaching the limit.

In this embodiment, the limit notification effect for notifying the remaining number of times until reaching the limit or notifying whether or not it is immediately before reaching the limit is performed by the player pressing the effect button 109, the cross key 110, or the like during a normal game or a special game. It may be configured to be executable when a specific input operation is performed through the lever 112 . In this case, there may be no display prompting the player to perform a specific input operation, and a "backward command effect" may be provided in which only the player who knows the specific input operation can execute the limit notification effect. When it is possible to execute a limit notification effect by performing a specific input operation during a special game that is executed during a pattern change that will result in a big win or after the symbols that will result in a big win are stopped, it will be notified whether or not the limit will be reached by the big win. may be It should be noted that, instead of informing whether or not the limit has been reached, it is possible to inform whether or not the state is shifted to the probability fluctuation state after the end of the special game. That is, by performing a specific input operation during a special game that is executed during a big-hit symbol variation or after a big-hit symbol is stopped, it may be notified whether or not the state will shift to the probability variation state after the special game. . This is because when the limit is not reached, the state can be shifted to the probability fluctuation state, and when the limit is reached, the state is always shifted to the normal probability state. In addition, by entering a secret command under specific circumstances, it is possible to notify the remaining number of times until the limit is reached, whether it is just before reaching the limit, or whether it will transition to a probability fluctuation state after the special game ends. You may make it plunge into the "back mode" which is the production mode which can be suggested. For example, after the lever 112 is operated during the special game, the effect button 109 may be pressed a predetermined number of times or the cross key 110 may be operated in a predetermined order to enter the hidden mode. In addition, once it is set to enter the back mode, the setting of the back mode may be maintained without inputting the back command again until the easy-ball-entering state ends and the normal ball-entering state is entered. , While the setting of the back mode is maintained, the notification or suggestion may always be executable during the symbol variation or during the special game.

In a configuration where at least one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is less than 100% probability variation, it suggests the degree of expectation to be shifted to the probability variation state during the pattern variation that becomes a big hit or during the pattern variation before the pattern variation related to the big hit. It is also possible to make it possible to execute an expectation level suggesting effect. Since the probability variation is less than 100%, there are at least a probability variation jackpot pattern (first jackpot pattern) and a non-probability variation jackpot pattern (second jackpot pattern) as types of symbols indicating a big hit, and the first jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed. After finishing the special game to be executed later, it is possible to shift to the probability fluctuation state, and after finishing the special game to be executed after the stop display of the second big winning pattern, it is possible to shift to the normal probability state. When the cumulative number of stop-displayed first jackpot symbols reaches a predetermined number (for example, 6 times) during the probability variation continuation from the normal probability state to the probability fluctuation state to the next normal probability state, After the end of the special game executed after the stop display of the first big win symbol in which the cumulative number of times during the probability variation continuation reaches a predetermined number (for example, 6 times), the state is shifted to the normal probability state. On the other hand, when the cumulative number of times that the first big hit symbol is stopped and displayed during the continuation of the probability variation is less than a predetermined number (eg, 5 times or less), the cumulative number of times during the continuation of the probability variation is less than the predetermined number (eg, 5 times or less). After the end of the special game executed after the stop display of the first jackpot symbol, the state is shifted to the probability variation state. In this configuration, according to whether or not the state is immediately before the limit is reached, an expectation degree suggesting effect is provided for suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether or not the probability fluctuation state will be reached after the first jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. The direction of presentation and the frequency of execution may be varied. Specifically, if the state is just before the limit is reached, that is, the cumulative number of times the first jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed during the continuation of the probability variation is the number obtained by subtracting 1 from the predetermined number (for example, 5 times) Under a specific situation , it is possible to execute an expectation level suggesting effect that suggests that the expectation level of shifting to the stochastic change state is relatively low, or the execution frequency of the expectation level suggesting effect that suggests the expectation level of shifting to the stochastic change state. is made relatively low, or the notification performance for notifying the transition to the probability variable state is not executed. On the other hand, if the state is not just before the limit is reached, that is, the cumulative number of times the first jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed during the continuation of the variable probability is less than the predetermined number minus 1 (for example, 4 times or less). Below, it is possible to execute an expectation suggesting effect that suggests that the expectation of moving to the stochastic change state is relatively high, or to execute an expectation suggesting effect that suggests the expectation of moving to the stochastic change state The frequency may be made relatively high, or a notification effect for definitely notifying that the state will be shifted to the probability variation state can be executed. For example, the sub-board 300 holds the cumulative number of times (or the remaining number of times until the limit is reached) that the first jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed during the continuation of the variable probability, and the cumulative number of times (or the remaining number of times until the limit is reached) is stored. Accordingly, different effects can be realized depending on whether it is immediately before the limit is reached or not by varying the execution mode of the expectation degree suggesting effect and the notification effect relating to the transition to the probability change state. For example, although it does not notify that the transition to the probability fluctuation state is definite, the expectation level suggestive effect that suggests that the possibility of transition to the probability fluctuation state is relatively high (for example, the probability fluctuation state It is preferable to apply the above specifications to the expectation level suggesting effect that suggests that the transition expectation level is 90%.

In the above configuration, it may be possible to execute an expectation degree suggesting effect or a notification effect related to the transition to the probability change state during the symbol change in which the probability variable jackpot pattern (first jackpot pattern) is stopped and displayed. Depending on whether or not it is immediately before the limit is reached at the time before the stop display, the mode of execution of the expectation degree suggesting performance and the notification performance during the symbol variation in which the first big win symbol is stopped and displayed may be changed. For example, if the limit is reached immediately before the stop display of the first jackpot symbol, the execution frequency of the expectation level suggesting effect during the symbol fluctuation when the first jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed is reduced, or the expected level of expectation that is suggested is reduced. may be lowered, or the notification effect for notifying the transition to the probability variation state may not be executed. The mode of execution of the expectation degree suggestion effect during symbol fluctuation in which the first jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed immediately before the limit is reached is the expectation degree suggestion during pattern fluctuation in which the non-variable jackpot pattern (second jackpot pattern) is stopped and displayed. It may be the same as the execution mode of production. In other words, the frequency of execution is low for both the expectation degree suggesting effect during pattern fluctuation in which the first jackpot pattern that reaches the limit is stopped and displayed, and the expectation degree suggesting effect during pattern fluctuation in which the second jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, the suggested degree of expectation may be lowered, or the notification effect for notifying the transition to the probability variation state may not be executed. On the other hand, if the time before the stop display of the first jackpot pattern is not immediately before the limit is reached, the execution frequency of the expectation degree suggesting effect during the pattern fluctuation in which the first jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed is increased, or the suggested expectation degree is set. may be increased, or an informing effect for informing the transition to the probability variation state may be made executable. In this case, compared with the execution mode of the expectation degree suggesting performance during the pattern fluctuation in which the second big winning pattern is stopped and displayed, the expectation degree suggesting performance during the pattern fluctuation in which the first big winning pattern that does not reach the limit is stopped and displayed. may be executed more frequently, the suggested degree of expectation may be increased, or a notification effect may be executed to notify that the state will be shifted to the probability variation state.

In the above configuration, when it is pre-read that it will be a probability variable jackpot pattern (first jackpot pattern) based on the preliminary determination result of the win-fail lottery value and the pattern lottery value, the pattern that digests the pre-read win-fail lottery value and the pattern lottery value During the symbol variation before the variation, it may be possible to execute an expectation degree suggesting effect or a notification effect relating to the transition to the probability variation state. Furthermore, depending on whether or not it is immediately before the limit is reached at the time of symbol variation before the symbol variation for digesting the pre-read success or failure lottery value and symbol lottery value, the execution mode of the expectation degree suggesting effect and the notification effect is varied. may For example, when the lottery value corresponding to the first jackpot design is pre-determined and it is just before the limit is reached, the execution frequency of the expectation suggesting effect during the pattern fluctuation before the pattern fluctuation in which the first jackpot design is stopped and displayed. may be lowered, the suggested degree of expectation may be lowered, or the notification effect for notifying the transition to the probability variation state may not be executed. When the expectation degree suggesting performance by reading the lottery value corresponding to the first big win pattern in advance is executed in a state immediately before the limit is reached, the execution mode of the expectation degree suggesting performance corresponds to the non-probable variable big winning pattern (second big winning pattern). It may be the same as the execution mode of the expectation degree suggesting effect by prefetching the lottery value. In other words, the frequency of execution of both the expectations suggesting effect during pattern fluctuations in which the first jackpot pattern that reaches the limit is prefetched and the expectation degree suggestion production during pattern fluctuations in which the second jackpot pattern is prefetched is reduced. Alternatively, the suggested degree of expectation may be lowered, or the notification effect for notifying the transition to the probability variation state may not be executed. On the other hand, when the lottery value corresponding to the first jackpot pattern is determined in advance and it is not immediately before the limit is reached, the execution frequency of the expectation suggesting effect during the pattern fluctuation before the pattern fluctuation in which the first jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed. may be increased, the suggested degree of expectation may be increased, or a notification effect for notifying transition to the probability variation state may be made executable. In this case, compared with the execution mode of the expectation degree suggesting performance during the pattern fluctuation in which the second big win pattern is foreseen, the execution of the expectation degree suggesting performance during the pattern fluctuation in which the first big win pattern that does not reach the limit is foreseen. The frequency may be increased, the suggested degree of expectation may be increased, or a notification effect may be executed to notify transition to the probability variation state.

In this embodiment, when a special symbol indicating a big hit is stopped and displayed after execution of a predetermined special performance, the probability change state may be ensured after the special game executed after the stop display is finished. The predetermined special effect may be an effect in which the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device is stopped and displayed as a special pattern, and whether or not the transition to the probability change state is possible is notified depending on the type of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed. may For example, if the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is a number (for example, 222 or 333), it is suggested that the possibility of not shifting to the probability fluctuation state is suggested, while the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is a specific character (for example, SSS). In some cases a transition to a stochastic variation state may be determined.

In a configuration in which a limit and a fall are combined, the selection tendency of the variation pattern may be changed in the pattern variation in which the number of symbol variations that can be the end of the easy-to-ball state is a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), for example, a specific variation The pattern may be fixedly selected. In the pattern variation where the number of symbol variations is a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), there is a tendency to select a variation pattern that does not depend on the number of reservations of the lottery value reserved by the special figure reservation means 241, while the number of symbol variations is a predetermined number. Before and after becoming (for example, 99 times and 101 times) in the pattern fluctuation, it may be a selection tendency of the fluctuation pattern depending on the number of reservations of the lottery value reserved in the special figure reservation means 241. For example, in a symbol variation with a predetermined number of symbol variations (for example, 100 times), it is possible to select a specific notification variation pattern for notifying whether or not the easy-to-enter state continues, and selection of the variation pattern. Variation patterns may be determined using variation pattern selection criteria whose trend does not depend on the number of reservations. On the other hand, in the pattern variations before and after the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 99 times and 101 times), the larger the number of reservations, the more likely it is that a variation pattern with a shorter variation time will be selected. may be determined.

(Example 3: setting suggestion effect)
In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect for suggesting to the player the setting value of the gaming machine set by the setting change means. Since the setting values of each game machine can be confirmed only in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, only the manager of the game machine such as a game store employee can check it, and the player cannot directly know the setting value. can't. On the other hand, since the setting value of the gaming machine can affect the probability of winning big, it is very important for the player whether or not the game setting corresponds to the game specifications that are advantageous to the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, the setting suggesting effect is made executable, and the setting suggesting effect is made executable when a specific condition is satisfied.

The setting-suggestion effect may be made executable with the detection of the game ball as a trigger. In this case, the setting suggesting effect may be executed each time a game ball is detected, or the setting suggesting effect may be executed each time the game ball is detected a predetermined number of times. Also, a lottery value may be obtained each time a game ball is detected once or a predetermined number of times, and the setting suggestion effect may be executed under the condition that the lottery value becomes a predetermined result. Also, the setting suggestion effect may be executed immediately after the game ball is detected, or the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a predetermined timing after the game ball is detected. In the latter case, after the game ball is detected, the setting suggestion effect may be executed under the condition that the setting suggestion effect in the progress of the game or in the progress of the effect becomes executable.

The setting-suggestion effect may be executable with the transition of the game state as a trigger. In this case, the setting suggesting effect may be executed at the start, during the fluctuation, or at the stop of the fluctuation of the symbols after the transition of the game state. In addition, the setting suggesting effect may be executed during the first pattern fluctuation period after the game state shifts, or the setting suggesting effect may be executed after the pattern is changed a predetermined number of times after the game state shifts. . In addition, the setting suggesting effect may be executed when pattern variation is performed according to a specific variation pattern such as reach variation after the transition of the game state.

The setting suggestion effect can be executed in various modes. The setting suggestion effect may be executed using the effect image displayed on the effect display device 60, may be a character actuation effect by the action of the movable character object 66, or may be an effect output from the speaker 108. It may be performed using voice, it may be performed using lighting of the decoration lamp 111, and it may be performed by these arbitrary combinations. The setting suggestion effect may be executed with the operation of the effect button 109 or the lever 112 as a trigger.

The setting suggestion effect may be executed in such a manner that it is possible to specify which of a plurality of settings (for example, setting 1 to setting 6) the setting value of the gaming machine is. For example, a plurality of types (for example, 6 types) of setting suggestion effects corresponding to each of a plurality of settings may be prepared, and which setting value is suggested depending on which one of them is executed. It should be noted that the set value of the gaming machine does not have to correspond perfectly to the type of setting suggestion effect to be executed, and the probability of which one of the plurality of types of setting suggestion effect is to be executed can be varied according to the set value. may For example, a first setting suggesting effect suggesting a relatively high setting and a second setting suggesting effect suggesting a relatively low setting are prepared. The execution probability of the first-set suggestion effect may be increased, and the execution probability of the second-set suggestion effect may be decreased. In addition, a setting suggesting effect that confirms that the setting is at least a specific value may be executed. For example, relatively advantageous set values (for example, setting 4 to setting 6) when the third setting suggesting effect is executed. It may be suggested that In addition, when a specific type of setting suggestion effect is executed, the setting value is determined, while when a setting suggestion effect different from the specific type is executed, which setting value is determined. It may not be fixed.

The execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect may differ according to the setting value of the gaming machine. For example, in the case of a more advantageous setting, the frequency of execution of the setting suggestion effect may be high, and in the case of a more disadvantageous setting, the frequency of execution of the setting suggestion effect may be low. In this case, the probability that the lottery value acquired with the detection of the game ball as a trigger will have a predetermined result may be varied according to the set value. In addition, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect to be executed may be varied according to the difference in the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect due to the difference in the set value. For example, at a specific setting value (for example, setting 6), the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect may be relatively low, while the highly reliable setting suggestion effect may be executed. As a specific example, in setting 6, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect triggered by the satisfaction of the specific condition is 5%, and in settings 4 and 5, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect triggered by the satisfaction of the specific condition is 10%. and Further, in setting 6, the execution probability of the first suggestion effect suggesting high setting is set to 90% or more, while in settings 4 and 5, the execution probability of the first suggestion effect suggesting high setting is set to 60% to 80%. . In this case, the set value of the game machine can be suggested by a combination of the execution frequency and type of the setting suggestion effect to be executed.

The setting suggestion effect may be executed by a specific cut-in effect inserted in the middle of the symbol variation. The specific cut-in effect may be a setting-suggestion-dedicated effect. The specific cut-in effect for setting suggestion may be a effect display that occupies almost the entire display area of the effect display device, and the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in the center of the screen is temporarily displayed during the display period of the specific cut-in effect. may be hidden. A specific cut-in effect may vary in execution frequency according to the setting value of the gaming machine. For example, it may be suggested that the higher the execution frequency of a specific cut-in effect, the higher the set value of the gaming machine. Here, the execution frequency of a specific cut-in effect can be defined as the ratio of the number of times of symbol variations accompanied by the execution of a specific cut-in effect to the total number of symbol variations. The execution frequency of the specific cut-in effect may differ depending on the game state, and the execution frequency may differ between the normal probability state and the probability variation state. For example, when the gaming machine has a specific set value, the execution frequency of a specific cut-in effect in the probability variation state may be lower than in the normal probability state. Conversely, the execution frequency of a specific cut-in effect may be higher in the probability variation state than in the normal probability state. A specific cut-in effect may be executed more frequently in the first half than in the latter half of the pattern variation. The frequency may be high.

The setting suggesting effect may be executed by the effect in which a specific character appears in the middle of the pattern change. The setting value of the game machine may be suggested by the execution frequency of the character reach effect. The character ready-to-win effect may be executed less frequently than the above-described cut-in effect, and may be set to, for example, about 1/10 of the execution frequency of a specific cut-in effect. The character ready-to-win effect may be configured such that it is easier to determine the difference in set values according to the difference in the execution frequency than in the above-described cut-in effect. In other words, the execution frequency of the character reach effect is determined so that the difference in the execution frequency is relatively large according to the difference in the setting value, while the execution frequency of the specific cut-in effect is determined according to the difference in the setting value. The execution frequency may be determined so that the difference between is relatively small. Also, the character ready-to-win effect may be opposite to the above-described cut-in effect in terms of the difference in execution frequency according to the game state. For example, the execution frequency of a specific cut-in effect may be higher in the normal probability state than in the probability change state, while the execution frequency of the character ready-to-win effect may be higher in the probability change state than in the normal probability state.

The setting suggesting effect may be executed by reproducing a predetermined sound effect when the ball enters a predetermined ball entrance. For example, it may be suggested that the set value of the gaming machine is high when a predetermined sound effect is played when the ball enters the starting hole. For example, in the case of setting 1-3, the predetermined effect sound triggered by the ball entering the starting hole is not played, whereas in the case of setting 4-6, the predetermined sound effect triggered by the ball entering the starting hole is played. may be played back. Alternatively, the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of reproduction of the predetermined sound effect triggered by the ball entering the starting opening. In this case, a predetermined sound effect may be reproduced in any of settings 1-6, or a predetermined sound effect may be reproduced only when the setting value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, setting 4-6). Good. In addition, only when the number of reservations reserved by the special figure reservation means 241 is a predetermined number or more (for example, 3 or more), a predetermined sound effect triggered by the ball entering the starting port is reproduced, or the reservation It may be arranged such that the greater the number, the higher the frequency of reproduction of the predetermined sound effect triggered by the ball entering the starting hole. A predetermined sound effect may be reproducible only when the ball enters a specific starting hole. For example, even if it is possible to reproduce a predetermined sound effect triggered by the ball entering the first starting port, and not to reproduce the predetermined sound effect triggered by the ball entering the second starting port. good.

When the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a disengaged manner, the setting suggesting effect may be executed by means of a chance effect in which the decorative symbols are a combination of odd or even numbers or a combination of same color symbols. For example, when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a combination of even-numbered patterns or a combination of blue patterns that suggest a relatively low expectation, the first set value or more (for example, setting 2 or more) is suggested, and if the combination of odd-numbered symbols or the combination of red-colored symbols suggesting that the degree of expectation is relatively high, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the setting is higher than the first set value. A second setting value or greater (eg, a setting of 3 or greater) may be suggested. In setting values (for example, setting 2-6) that enable setting suggestion by chance game effect, the execution frequency of chance game effect may be changed according to the set value, or chance game effect may be executed regardless of the set value. The execution frequency may be the same. For example, in the case of the setting 1, the chance game effect may not be executed, and in the case of the setting 2-6, the chance game effect may be executed with the same execution frequency. In addition, when a specific combination of symbols (for example, 315, 634, 357), which is an outlier mode, it may be determined that the number is equal to or higher than a specific set value. For example, setting 4 or more, setting 5 or more may be determined, or setting 6 may be determined.

A setting suggesting effect may be executed by a special effect that is executed when the cumulative number of symbol variations reaches a specific number. For example, a special effect may be executed every 50 or 100 rotations, and the set value of the gaming machine may be suggested according to the content of the special effect to be executed. For example, any one of a plurality of special effects with different expectations can be executed with a pattern change that is a specific number of times, and a set value may be suggested according to the type of special effect to be executed. In addition, the lower the set value, the higher the execution frequency of the low-expectation special effects, the higher the execution frequency of the medium-expectation special effects at setting 3-4, and the higher the set value of the high-expectation special effects. The frequency of execution may be increased as much as possible. In addition, when the set value is an odd number (settings 1, 3, 5), a special effect may be prepared in which the execution frequency is higher than when the setting value is an even number (settings 2, 4, 6), or vice versa. A special effect may be prepared in which the execution frequency is higher when the values are even numbers (settings 2, 4, 6) than when the values are odd numbers (settings 1, 3, 5). Also, a special effect may be executed in which it is determined that the set value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. For example, a special effect in which the setting of 3 or more is determined, or a special effect in which the setting of 5 or more is determined may be prepared. A special effect for which it is determined that the set value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value may be executed less frequently than a special effect that can be executed for all set values.

The special effect executed when the cumulative number of symbol variations reaches a specific number may be set such that the higher the number of symbol variations, the higher the accuracy of the set value suggested by the special effect. For example, when the number of symbol variations is small (for example, 50 times to 400 times), the difference in execution frequency according to the difference in the setting value of a specific special effect is reduced, while when the number of symbol variations is large (for example, 450 times 700 times), the difference in the execution frequency may be increased according to the difference in the set value of a specific special effect. In other words, by increasing the difference in execution frequency, it may be made easier to determine which set value a specific special effect corresponds to. For example, when a specific special effect is executed, the possibility of a predetermined set value or a set value higher than a predetermined value is higher than when another special effect is executed, or a specific special effect is executed. If so, it is desirable to execute a special effect so as to determine that the set value is a predetermined set value or a set value equal to or greater than the predetermined value. In addition, a special effect in which the difference in execution frequency increases as the number of symbol variations increases, and a special effect in which the difference in execution frequency does not change regardless of the number of symbol variations may be alternately performed. For example, in the number of symbol variations ending in 50 such as 50 times, 150 times and 250 times, it is possible to execute a special effect in which the execution frequency is constant regardless of the number of symbol variations, while 100 times, 200 times, In the number of symbol variations ending in 00, such as 300 times, it is possible to execute a special effect in which the execution frequency can be changed according to the number of symbol variations. Further, when the number of symbol variations exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 800 times, 900 times) and the set value is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the execution frequency of the special effect that confirms that the set value is greater than or equal to the predetermined number is determined by the number of symbol variations. It may be made higher than when the set value is less than a predetermined number, or only a special effect in which it is determined that the set value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value may be executed.

In the case of a deviation due to a pattern variation accompanied by a super reach performance with a high expectation of a big hit, a setting suggestion performance is executed by a specific cut-in performance that can be executed immediately before the special pattern stop display at the end of the pattern variation. good too. The specific cut-in effect may be an end effect indicating that the super ready-to-win effect has ended due to a loss, and is executed after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the super ready-to-win effect in a lost mode. It may be "shutter performance". Shutter production is a production that displays the process of closing a shutter or door of a size corresponding to the entire screen. This is an effect in which the decorative pattern and the background image become invisible (hide) when the door is completely closed. Through this production process, the scene is changed for the next pattern change, for example, by opening a completely closed shutter or door, the decorative pattern for the next pattern change can be seen (displayed). )do. The shutter effect may be executed after the stop display (fixed stop) in which the decorative pattern is removed in the super ready-to-win effect, and the pattern change next to the change in which the decorative pattern is removed in the super ready-to-win effect. May be run at startup. As for the shutter effect, a shutter effect with setting suggestion and a shutter effect without setting suggestion may be prepared. In the shutter effect that suggests the set value, set by adding a specific character or wording when the shutter closes, or by changing the shutter display color to a color that suggests high expectations such as red or gold. Value expectations may be suggested. On the other hand, in the shutter rendering without setting suggestions, when the shutter is closed, specific characters or words are not added, and the shutter is displayed in a normal color such as gray. Regarding such a shutter effect, the execution frequency may be increased as the set value is higher, or a specific shutter effect may be executable only when the set value is equal to or higher than a predetermined value.

The shutter effect described above may be used for a resurrection effect in which a big hit is achieved after pretending to be out in the super ready-to-win effect. For example, it is informed that a big hit is achieved by performing a resurrection effect after a process of temporary stop display in a super ready-to-win effect in which decorative symbols are removed and the shutter is closed. At this time, by setting the shutter effect in a specific display mode, it may be notified in advance that the resurrection effect will be executed after that and the big win will be achieved. Further, it may be confirmed that the set value is equal to or higher than a predetermined value by a shutter performance of a display mode for notifying in advance that a big hit will occur. Further, a plurality of kinds of shutter performances of display modes for notifying in advance that a big hit will be made are prepared, and in a specific shutter performance, it is confirmed that a set value is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, setting 2 or more), and a revival performance is executed. may be determined. In another specific shutter effect, it may be determined that the set value is 6 and that the resurrection effect is to be executed.

When a mode selection screen for selecting one of a plurality of production modes is displayed during pattern fluctuation or during a special game, setting suggestions are made depending on the type of selection candidates on the mode selection screen and the difference in the display order of selection candidates. good too. For example, the production mode (specific production mode) that can be displayed first on the normal mode selection screen is displayed in another position such as the second or third on the mode selection screen for suggesting settings that is not normal. It may indicate that the setting is high if This setting suggestion mode selection screen can be displayed instead of the normal mode selection screen at the timing when the normal mode selection screen can be displayed. You may make it easy to display a screen. As a result, the lower the set value is, the more frequently the specific production mode is displayed as the first selection candidate, while the higher the setting value is, the more the specific production mode is displayed as the second or third selection candidate. The frequency may be higher. Further, it may be determined that the set value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value or that the set value is an even number (settings 2, 4, 6) by displaying a specific effect mode fourth. Furthermore, it may be suggested that the setting value is high when a special production mode that is normally not selectable is included in the selection candidates of the mode selection screen, for example, the higher the setting value, the more special production mode The frequency of inclusion in the selection candidates on the mode selection screen may be increased.

The setting suggesting effect may be executed by a mode end effect indicating that the advantageous mode ends when the game state is changed from the game state advantageous to the player to the game state disadvantageous. For example, in the normal ball entry state, after the special figure 1 is a big hit and the transition to the easy ball entry state ends, the special figure 2 is not a big hit and the easy ball entry state ends (for example, A setting suggestion may be made in the effect displayed at the 100th turn, which is the end of the easy state. For example, when the set value is relatively low, the mode end effect is executed with a display color that suggests low expectations such as gray, blue, and green, while when the set value is relatively high The mode ending effect may be executed in a display color such as red or gold, which suggests a high degree of expectation. In addition, a high set value may be suggested when a specific character appears or a specific sound effect is played in the mode end presentation. In addition, when the mode end effect of the gold display color is displayed, it may be determined that the set value is a predetermined value or more (for example, setting 4 or more or setting 5 or more), or the mode end effect of gold color may be specified. It may be determined that setting 6 is combined with the reproduction of sound effects. The mode end effect accompanied by the setting suggestion may be executed when the probability change state is shifted to the normal probability state by the falling determination to the effect that the player falls to the normal probability state. In addition, when the limit is reached and the state is shifted to the normal probability state, or when the limit is reached and the state is shifted to the normal probability state and the easy-to-enter state. final variation) may be executed during variation display or when variation is stopped.

The setting suggesting effect may be executed by a mode entry effect indicating that the player enters into an advantageous mode by shifting to a game state that is advantageous to the player. For example, in the normal entry state, the special figure 1 becomes a big hit and transitions to the easy entry state, and then the special figure 2 becomes a big hit and the final stage is the easy entry state with a large number of symbol fluctuations (for example, 100 times). A setting suggestion may be made in the mode entry effect when it becomes possible to shift to. The mode entry effect at this time may be executed after the jackpot pattern that triggers the entry into an advantageous mode is stopped and before the start of the special game, or may be executed in the end demonstration of the special game. good. In the mode entry effect, a high set value may be suggested by the display color of words indicating mode entry, or a high set value may be suggested when a specific character appears. Further, it may be confirmed that the setting value is a predetermined value or more (for example, setting 5 or more or setting 6) when the text indicating mode entry is gold or rainbow color. note that,
The setting suggestion effect can be displayed only when it is first shifted to the advantageous mode, which is an easy-to-enter state with a large number of pattern fluctuations at the end, and is displayed when the advantageous mode continues as a big hit in the advantageous mode. It does not have to be executed in the mode continuation effect.

(Example 4: Winning effect)
In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a winning effect indicating that a prize ball has been given when a ball enters a general winning hole and a big winning hole (generally referred to as a winning hole). In the prize-winning effect, the number of prize balls to be given when the ball enters the prize-winning hole is displayed in numbers, and the total number of prize balls obtained from a specific timing to the present can be displayed. For example, when a ball is entered into a general winning hole with three prize balls, a winning effect displaying "+3" indicating that three prize balls have been won can be executed and displayed on the screen. Add 3 to the total number of wins earned. In addition, when the ball enters the big winning hole with 13 winning balls, it is possible to execute the winning effect of adding 13 to the total winning number. At this time, instead of displaying the number (eg, 1013) obtained by adding the number of winnings (eg, 13) to the current total number of winnings (eg, 1000) immediately after winning, the total number of winnings is counted up one by one. To make it possible to execute a winning presentation. Specifically, the total acquisition number is increased by one, such as 1001, 1002, 1003, and so on. As a result, the time required for counting up the total winning number, which is triggered by the entry of one game ball into the winning hole, is lengthened, and even if the number of awarded balls is the same, more prizes are awarded. To give a player an impression as if a ball was obtained. Furthermore, in this embodiment, during a special game in which the large winning opening is opened, a game ball heading for the large winning opening is provided so that additional winning balls can be obtained by entering the general winning opening (so-called bonus winning). There is a general winning entrance (so-called bonus winning entrance) in the middle of the route. As a result, the number of prize balls obtainable in one special game is additionally increased.

FIG. 40 shows the configuration of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 100 according to this embodiment. This drawing differs from the configuration of FIG. The bonus winning opening 501 is provided in the right passage of the game area, and is provided at a position where the game ball can enter when hitting the game ball to the right toward the big winning opening 20 . The bonus winning opening 501 is provided at a position where a game ball passing through the second operation opening 32 cannot enter. The bonus prize winning opening 501 is provided with a bonus winning detection device 511 for detecting the entry of a game ball into the bonus winning prize opening 501 . The bonus winning detection device 511 is a sensor that detects a ball entering the bonus winning opening 501 and generates bonus winning information indicating the ball entering the bonus winning opening 501 .

FIG. 41 shows a display example of a winning effect that can be executed during a special game. As shown in the figure, the screen during the special game includes a guide display 520 that guides right-handed hitting, a special game round number display 522, an over winning display 524 that indicates over winning in the big winning opening, and a winning in the bonus winning opening 501. A bonus winning display 526 and a total winning number display 528 of winning balls can be displayed. The over winning display 524 can be displayed when the number of balls entered into the big winning opening exceeds a specified number (for example, 10 balls) which is the closing condition of the big winning opening opened during the unit game. . Normally, the number of balls that can be entered into the big prize hole during one unit game is up to a specified number, and when the number of balls reaches the specified number, multiple game balls enter the big prize hole in succession. As a result, more than the specified number of balls can be entered (so-called over-winning). Since the frequency of occurrence of such an over-win is low and it is advantageous for the player, the over-win display 524 that expresses the occurrence of the over-win is made possible. In the over winning display 524, "+13" is displayed to indicate that the number of winning balls (for example, 13) that can be obtained by entering the big winning opening has been won. Similarly, when a ball enters the bonus winning slot 501 during the special game, a bonus winning display 526 is enabled to show the occurrence of the bonus winning, and the number of winning balls obtainable by the bonus winning is enabled. A "+3" is displayed to indicate that (eg, 3) have been acquired. When the bonus prize and the over prize win occur at the same time, the over prize prize display 524 and the bonus prize prize display 526 can be displayed at the same time.

The over-winning effect and the bonus-winning effect may be accompanied not only by image display on the effect display device 60, but also by voice effect in which a predetermined sound effect is output, or by voice effect alone without image display. . That is, the over-winning effect may be 1) combined image display and audio output, 2) image display only, or 3) audio output only. Similarly, the bonus prize effect may be 4) combined image display and audio output, 5) image display only, or 6) audio output only. For example, message voices such as "Good job", "Good job", and "Congratulations" may be output as a voice effect for over winning or bonus winning. In addition, sound effects such as "picon" and "shakin" may be output. When the over winning and the bonus winning occur at the same time, the audio output for the over winning effect and the audio output for the bonus winning effect can be output from the speaker 108 at the same time.

The numerical value shown in the total winning number display 528 at the bottom right of the screen is counted up when the ball enters the prize winning opening, and the numerical value is displayed so as to increase by one, for example. In other words, the display of changing or updating the numerical value shown in the total winning number display 528 is continuously performed the same number of times as the number of prize balls that can be obtained by winning. For example, when 13 prize balls can be acquired by entering the big winning hole, a count-up display that adds 1 to the numerical value shown in the total winning number display 528 is generated 13 times. In other words, the total winning number display 528 is incremented each time a bonus prize or a prize in a big prize slot occurs.

An example of the time required for one count-up display of the total acquisition number display 528 is about 10 milliseconds to 50 milliseconds. Therefore, the execution time of the count-up display executed by entering one ball into the big winning hole is about 130 to 650 milliseconds if the number of winning balls in the big winning hole is 13. Also, if the upper limit of the number of balls that can be entered into the big winning slot in one unit game (one round) is 10, it is necessary to count up and display the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one round of 130. The execution time is approximately 1.3 seconds to 6.5 seconds. The time required for the count-up display of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one round may be shorter than the end demonstration time of the special game. Thus, the count-up display of prize balls obtained during the special game can be completed by the end of the end demonstration period of the special game, that is, by the time the normal game is shifted to the start of the next pattern variation.

When a plurality of winning detections due to balls entering the winning opening occur consecutively, the count-up display of the total winning number display 528 is executed sequentially until the total number of winning balls that can be obtained due to the multiple occurrences of winning has been counted up. be done. Since the time value required for one count-up display is fixed, if the total number of prize balls that can be obtained is large due to multiple winning detections occurring in succession, the total number of prize balls is reflected. It takes time for the count-up display, and there is a possibility that the count-up display will not be completed until the next winning. In this case, the count-up display currently in progress is completed without interrupting the count-up display in progress or skipping the count-up display one by one and skipping to the number reflecting the total number of prize balls. After that, the count-up display corresponding to the next prize is executed. As a result, the count-up display is always executed for the same number of prize balls as the number of prize balls won, so that even if the number of prize balls given is the same, the player is given the impression that more prize balls have been obtained. be given to

FIG. 42 shows an example of the change flow of the total acquisition number display 528 . This figure shows the game process when 11 balls enter the big winning hole 20 and 2 balls enter the bonus winning hole 501 during one unit game. Since the upper limit of the number of balls entering the big winning opening in one unit game is 10, the 11th ball entering the big winning opening is an over winning. At the bottom of the figure, a graph is displayed showing the total number of won prize balls, which is gradually increased according to the winning detection. The thin line in the graph is the actual value when the number of prize balls is added at the winning detection timing, and the thick line in the graph is the display value displayed as the total winning number display 528 . As illustrated, one count-up display in the total acquisition number display 528 takes a certain amount of time, so there is an upper limit to the increase speed of the displayed value in the total acquisition number display 528 . On the other hand, the actual value of the total number of won prize balls can be increased by a plurality of values such as 3 or 13 at the winning detection timing, so it can increase faster than the displayed value is updated. As a result, the displayed value is less than the actual value immediately after the winning is detected, and the displayed value increases at a constant speed until the displayed value catches up with the actual value. When the displayed value catches up with the actual value, the count-up display of the displayed value ends. After that, when the actual value increases again, the displayed value is counted up so as to catch up with the increased actual value, and the counted up display is performed until the actual value matches the displayed value. Even if winning is detected at the starting port (for example, the second starting port 12) during a special game, the count-up display currently being executed continues without interruption. The accompanying prize balls are excluded from the addition target of the count-up display of the total winning number display 528 .

FIG. 43 shows an effect display example displaying that the total number of winning balls reaches a predetermined number. In this figure, when the display value of the total winning number display 528 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 2000), a highlighted display 530 of "Achieved 2000!" is displayed. The highlighting 530 is continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time (eg, 0.5 second, 1 second), and the numerical value of the number of winning balls (eg, 2000) indicated by the highlighting 530 remains fixed. On the other hand, the display value of the total acquisition number display 528 at the bottom right of the screen can be counted up in parallel even when the highlight display 530 is continuously displayed. Further, when over winning or bonus winning occurs during the display of the highlighting 530, over winning display 524 and bonus winning display 526 can be displayed in parallel while the highlighting 530 is being displayed. In addition to the highlight display 530, a voice effect may be executed to notify that the total number of winning balls has reached a predetermined number. good. In addition, during the execution of the voice effect for notifying by voice that the total number of winning balls has reached a predetermined number, the count-up display of the total number of winning balls display 528, the over winning display 524, the bonus winning display 526, etc. are displayed in parallel. can be displayed as In other words, the highlighting 530 can be displayed in parallel with the image display of the over-winning effect and the image display of the bonus winning effect. Simultaneous output may be possible in parallel with audio output. In this case, the display priority of the highlighted display 530 is preferably set higher than the display priority of the image display of the over winning effect and the display priority of the image display of the bonus winning effect. In other words, it is desirable that the highlight display 530 is displayed in front of the image display for the over winning effect and the image display for the bonus winning effect.

The display of the total number of winning balls described above may be displayed both during the special game and during the normal game. The display of the total acquired number may be displayed only in the easy-to-enter state, and may not be displayed in the normal-enter state. For example, when a special game is executed with a big win in the special figure 1 in the normal ball-entering state, and the transition to the easy-ball-entering state is made after the special game is over, the total acquisition number display 528 is displayed with the start of the special game as a trigger. Alternatively, the total winning number display 528 may be continuously displayed even during the symbol variation after the special game is finished. As long as the easy-to-ball state continues, the total win display 528 may continue to be displayed even after the probability change state ends. That is, even when the high-probability, high-ball-entering state transitions to the low-probability, high-ball-entering state, the total acquisition number display 528 may be continuously displayed in the low-probability, high-ball-entering state.

FIG. 44 shows a display example of the total winning number display 528 during the normal game. This figure shows an example of effect display during symbol variation in the easy-to-enter state. There is a guide display 520 for hitting right at the top of the screen, and there is a total number of wins display 528 at the bottom right of the screen. In the center of the screen, a decorative design 540 (also called a main design) is variably displayed, and in the lower part of the screen, the variable object 542 suggesting the degree of expectation of the change and the reserved object 542 suggesting the degree of expectation of the pending lottery value. 544 are displayed. Also, at the right end of the screen, a simple pattern 546 (also called a sub-design) indicating that the pattern is changing is displayed, and at the left end of the screen, the number of reservations for each of the special figures 1 and 2 is displayed. There is a pending number display 548 . The simple design 546 is composed of, for example, a plurality of rows (for example, three rows) of symbols, and starts to be displayed when the special symbols start to fluctuate, and is stopped and displayed when the special symbols stop to fluctuate. In the illustrated example, the simple pattern 546 is composed of three vertical symbol rows, but the simple symbol may be composed of three horizontal symbol rows, or a plurality of symbols other than the three rows. A simple symbol may be composed of symbols in rows (for example, two rows), or may be composed of a single symbol row. The pending number display 548 displays the number of pending numbers by numbers, and in the illustrated example, the number of pending special figures 1 (for example, 3 in red) is displayed on the upper side, and the number of pending special figures 2 is displayed on the lower side (for example, 4) is displayed in blue.

When the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, the combination of the stopped symbols of the decorative symbols 540 and the combination of the stopped symbols of the simple symbols 546 are the same. For example, when the decorative symbol 540 stops at the "543" symbol combination, the simple symbol 546 also stops at the same "543" symbol combination. This figure shows an example of a screen in the production mode (also referred to as production mode A) in the easy-to-enter state. On the other hand, in the production mode (also referred to as production mode B) in the normal state of entering the ball, the decorative patterns are not only numbers, but numbers (for example, "1" or "2") and character images of the type corresponding to the numbers (for example, It is composed of a combination of characters A and B), and for example, a pattern in which the image of the character A is attached to the number ``1'' or a pattern in which the image of the character B is attached to the number ``2'' is used as a decoration pattern. However, the simple symbols in the production mode B are composed only of numbers and have the same display mode as the simple symbols 546 in the production mode A. The presentation contents or presentation tendencies to be displayed are different between the presentation mode A and the presentation mode B. For example, the contents of the background image and the presentation sound displayed when the pattern changes, suggesting the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed as a big hit. The contents of the advance notice effect and the super reach effect may differ. Note that the above-mentioned production mode A and production mode B may be used in the same game state, respectively, and for example, the above-mentioned production mode A and production mode B may be prepared as production modes in the normal ball entering state. However, the above-described effect mode A and effect mode B may be prepared as effect modes in the easy-to-enter state. The display position or display area of the decorative design on the screen when the first special design is variably displayed in production mode A is the same as the display position or display area of the decorative design on the screen when the second special design is variably displayed in production mode A. , and the display position or display area of the simple pattern on the screen when the first special symbol is displayed in the production mode A is the same as the display position or display area of the second special symbol in the production mode A. It is the same as the display area on the screen of the simple pattern in the case of variable display. In addition, the display position or display area of the decorative design on the screen when the first special design is variably displayed in production mode B is the same as that of the decorative design when the second special design is variably displayed in production mode B. It is common to the display position or display area on the screen, and the display position or display area on the screen of the simple symbol when the first special symbol is displayed in the production mode B is the second special symbol in the production mode B. This is the same as the display area of the simple symbols on the screen when the symbols are variably displayed. On the other hand, the display position or display area of the decorative pattern on the screen when the first special pattern is variably displayed in production mode A is the decoration when the first special design is variably displayed in production mode B. Although different from the display position or display area of the pattern on the screen, the display position or display area of the simple pattern on the screen when the first special pattern is variably displayed in the production mode A is the first display position or display area in the production mode B. It is the same as the display area on the screen of the simple design when the special design is variably displayed. Similarly, the display position or display area of the decorative design on the screen when the second special design is variably displayed in production mode A is the same as that of the decorative design when the second special design is variably displayed in production mode B. Although the display position or display area on the screen differs from the display position or display area on the screen in the production mode A, the display position or display area on the screen of the simple pattern when the second special pattern is displayed in the production mode A is the second special pattern in the production mode B. This is the same as the display area of the simple symbols on the screen when the symbols are variably displayed. Here, it is preferable that the tendency of which symbol combination the decorative symbol and the simple symbol are stop-displayed differs depending on whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed. In other words, the display mode of the decorative design and the simple design at the time of design fluctuation is common regardless of whether the first special design or the second special design is displayed in a variable manner, whereas the decorative design and the simple design are stopped. It is preferable that the time symbol combination is configured so that it can be determined which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is variably displayed. For example, when the first special symbol is variably displayed, the symbol combination of decorative symbols and simple symbols at the time of stopping is configured so that the symbol combination of ``787'' is likely to occur when the first special symbol is lost, and the symbol combination of ``666'' is likely to occur when the jackpot is won. may be On the other hand, when the second special symbol is variably displayed, the symbol combination of decorative symbols and simple symbols at the time of stopping is configured so that the symbol combination of ``676'' is likely to occur when the second special symbol is lost, and the symbol combination of ``777'' is likely to occur when the big hit is achieved. may be As another modification, the number of kinds of symbol combinations when the simple symbols are stopped may be smaller than the number of kinds of symbol combinations when the decorative symbols are stopped. For example, the combination of simple symbols at the time of stop is only ``246'' at the time of loss, and only ``666'' and ``777'' at the time of a big hit, and the combination of symbols at the time of stop of decorative patterns is more than several dozen kinds at the time of failure, and a big hit. Sometimes eight types of "111", "222", . . . "888" may be used. Since the simple pattern 546 has a role of guaranteeing visibility to make it easy for the player to identify whether the result of the win/fail judgment is a big hit or a loss, the decorative pattern 540 can be displayed in various modes for production. If the number of kinds of symbol combinations at the time of stopping is reduced compared to , the capacity reduction and development design for the symbol combination data are facilitated accordingly.

At least a part of Specifications 1 to 6 described below may be applied to the decorative pattern 540 and the simple pattern 546 in this embodiment.
(Specification 1) The display area of the decorative symbols 540, which is easy for the player to visually recognize, is larger than the display area of the simple symbols 546 for ensuring the variable display and stop display of the symbols. For example, the display size of a single pattern forming at least one row of the plurality of decorative pattern rows of the decorative pattern 540 is larger than the display size of the single pattern forming at least one row of the plurality of simple pattern rows of the simple pattern 546.例文帳に追加
(Specification 2) The display position of the decorative pattern 540 is made different according to the game state, for example, it is made different according to whether it is an easy ball-entering state (performance mode A) or a normal ball-entering state (performance mode B). As a result, various variable performances using the decorative pattern 540 are realized. On the other hand, the simple pattern 546 is displayed at the same position in both the production mode A and the production mode B. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the development burden while securing the display state of the design by the simple design 546 .
(Specification 3) The display mode of a single pattern forming at least one row of the plurality of decorative pattern rows of the decorative pattern 540 is made different depending on whether the production mode is A or B. For example, in production mode A (easy-to-enter state), a single pattern of the decorative pattern 540 is configured with only numbers (for example, "1", "2", ... "8"), and production mode B In the (normal ball entry state), a single pattern of the decorative pattern 540 is composed of patterns combining numbers and character images (for example, "1+character A", "2+character B", ..., "8+character H"). to As a result, various variable performances using the decorative pattern 540 are realized. On the other hand, the simple pattern 546 is displayed in the same manner in both the production mode A and the production mode B. For example, in both the production mode A and the production mode B, a single pattern forming the simple pattern row of the simple pattern 546 is composed of only numbers (“1”, “2”, . . . “8”). As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the development burden while securing the display state of the design by the simple design 546 .
(Specification 4) The display area of the decorative pattern 540 is variable (movable) in the process of changing the pattern from the start to the end. For example, the display position changes depending on whether it is normal reach or super reach. make it loud As a result, various variable performances using the decorative pattern 540 are realized. On the other hand, the display area of the simple pattern 546 is fixed without changing (moving) from the start to the end of the pattern variation. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the development burden while securing the display state of the design by the simple design 546 .
(Specification 5) The variation speed of the decorative pattern 540 is variable to ultra-low speed, low speed, medium speed, high speed, ultra-high speed, etc. in the variation process from the start to the end of the pattern variation. In addition, at least one row of the plurality of decorative pattern rows of the decorative pattern 540 can be changed in a variable direction or in a scrolling direction. It is possible to change from the right to the diagonal direction. In addition, the variable display of the decorative pattern 540 is not limited to scroll display in a fixed direction. may be represented. As a result, various variable performances using the decorative pattern 540 are realized. On the other hand, the variable speed of the simple pattern 546 is set to a constant speed during the variable display, or only two steps, low speed and high speed, which are less than the number of steps of the variable speed of the decorative pattern 540.例文帳に追加Further, the variable display of the simple pattern 546 is limited to scrolling display or rotating display in a fixed direction, for example, scrolling only from top to bottom, scrolling from left to right, or rotating display only. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the development burden while securing the display state of the design by the simple design 546 .
(Specification 6) The decorative pattern 540 is displayed as if it were stopped by displaying the pattern with a slight fluctuation during the variable display of the special pattern, which is a timing different from when the special pattern stops fluctuating. Temporary stop display is possible. In the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols 540, it is possible to use special symbols different from the number symbols (e.g., "1", "2", ..., "8") used for the symbol combination at the time of stopping the fluctuation. Special symbols with words such as "SP" and "Development" that predict development, and special symbols with words such as "Super Heat" that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is high are temporarily stopped. can be As a result, it is possible to use the decoration pattern 540 to suggest the possibility of developing into a production process with a high degree of expectation, and it is possible to realize a more diverse variation production. On the other hand, the simple symbols 546 are not temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle of the variation process from the start to the end of the symbol variation, and the special symbols different from the number symbols are not stopped and displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the development burden while securing the display state of the design by the simple design 546 .

The guide display 520, the simple pattern 546, and the pending number display 548 are set with a high display priority, and are displayed with priority over other effect displays such as the decorative pattern 540 and the notice effect displayed in the center of the screen. In other words, the guidance display 520, the simple pattern 546 and the pending number display 548 overlap with the display of the decorative pattern 540 and the notice effect displayed in the center of the screen, and overlap on the front side of the display of the decorative pattern 540 and the notice effect. It is displayed so that it is not hidden by other effect displays. The total acquisition number display 528 is displayed so as not to overlap with the display having a high display priority such as the guidance display 520, the simple pattern 546 and the pending number display 548, and is displayed in the display area of the guidance display 520, the simple pattern 546 and the pending number display 548. are displayed in different areas.

The display count of total wins display 528 may be reset when certain conditions are met. For example, the display number of the total acquired number display 528 may be reset at the end of the easy-entering state, and the total acquired number display 528 may not be displayed in the subsequent normal-entering state. When a special game is executed as a big hit in the normal state where the total winning number display 528 is not displayed, the total winning number display 528 may be started with the start of the special game, and the initial value ( For example, the total wins display 528 may start at 0). Immediately after the end of the easy-to-enter state, the displayed number of the total acquired number display 528 may be reset to be hidden, or when an additional condition is satisfied after the end of the easy-to-enter state, the total acquired number display 528 may be displayed. may be hidden by resetting the display number of . For example, when the easy-to-enter state ends and the suspension of the special figure 2 is all digested, that is, when a new pattern variation of the special figure 1 can be started in the normal entry state, the total acquisition number display 528 may be reset and hidden. In addition, reset the display number of the total acquisition number display 528 when the number of pattern fluctuations in the normal ball entry state after the end of the easy ball entry state is a predetermined number (for example, 10 times, 20 times). to hide it. In this case, a special effect mode (special mode) is prepared in which the number of symbol variations in the normal state of entering the ball is within a predetermined number, and it is possible to stay in the symbol variation. may be reset to hide.

When over winning or bonus winning occurs while a specific error occurs, the performance display or audio output related to the over winning performance or the performance display or voice output related to the bonus winning performance may not be executed. For example, if at least one of over winning and bonus winning occurs during the occurrence of a "door/frame open error" indicating that the front frame or door of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is open, an over winning display (over winning Effect display related to the effect) and bonus winning display (effect display related to the bonus winning effect) may be made executable, while audio output related to over winning and bonus winning may be disabled. If a "door/frame open error" has occurred, priority may be given to audio output indicating the occurrence of an error. If an over-win or a bonus win occurs while the "door/frame open error" is occurring, the prize ball payout process based on the win may be executed as usual.

In addition, "magnetic sensor error" based on the detection of abnormal magnetism, "radio sensor error" based on the detection of abnormal radio waves, "disconnection short circuit power supply error" based on the detection of disconnection and short circuit, "excessive winning error" based on the detection of excessive winning When at least one of the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect occurs during the occurrence of ", both the effect display and the sound output related to the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect may be disabled. In addition, if at least one of "magnetic sensor error", "radio wave sensor error", "disconnection short circuit power supply error", and "excessive winning error" occurs, if over winning or bonus winning occurs, prize ball payout processing based on winning will not be performed. It may run normally.

In addition, if at least one of over-winning and bonus winning occurs during the occurrence of a "payout error" based on the detection of an abnormality in the payout process, both the effect display and audio output related to the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect can be executed. good too. In this case, since an error has occurred in the payout process, the payout process of the prize balls based on the over winning or the bonus winning is not executed.

The bonus winning effect described above may be made executable only during the execution of the special game, and may be made unexecutable during the execution of the normal game. When the bonus winning opening 501 is provided at a position where a ball can be entered by right-handed hitting, the bonus winning is triggered even if the game state is an easy ball entry state and the ball can be entered into the bonus winning opening 501.例文帳に追加Execution of the bonus prize effect may be disabled. Also, the execution of the bonus prize may be disabled during a part of the period during execution of the special game. The execution process of the special game consists of a) the start demo period, b) the execution period of the first unit game (first round big winning opening opening period), c) the interval period until the start of the next unit game, and d). Execution period of the second unit game (large winning opening period of the second round), e) Interval period until the next unit game starts, ..., f) Execution period of the last unit game (final round , g) the interval period until the start of the final demonstration, and h) the final demonstration period. At this time, the bonus winning may be executable only during execution of unit games and intervals between unit games during the execution period of the special game, and may not be executable during the start demonstration period and end demonstration period of the special game. In other words, from the timing at which the big winning opening is first opened in the special game to the timing at which the big winning opening is finally closed in the special game, or from the timing at which the big winning opening is first opened in the special game to the timing in the special game. The extra prize winning effect may be executed until the timing of starting the end demonstration after a predetermined time has passed since the big prize opening was finally closed. Similarly, with regard to the over winning effect, from the timing when the big winning gate is first opened in the special game to the timing when the big winning gate is finally closed in the special game, or when the big winning gate is first opened in the special game. It is also possible to make it possible to execute the over-win effect from the time when the special game is played until the start timing of the end demo is reached after a predetermined time has elapsed since the last big win opening was closed in the special game. As a result, even if an over-win or a bonus win occurs during the start demonstration period or the end demo period of the special game, the over-win effect or the bonus win effect may not be executed during the start demo period or the end demo period. .

As for the above-mentioned bonus prize winning effect, when the number of balls entering the bonus prize winning opening 501 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the bonus prize winning effect may be continuously executed for the same number of times as the number of balls entering the bonus prize winning opening. For example, when two game balls enter the bonus winning hole 501 in succession, the bonus winning effect may be executed twice in succession. In this case, the bonus winning display 526 may be hidden after the first bonus winning display 526 is continued for a predetermined time, and then hidden after the second bonus winning display 526 is continued for a predetermined time. . A sound effect relating to the bonus prize winning may be executed in conjunction with the start of the display of the bonus winning display 526, and the first audio effect may be output so that the effect sound is output twice in accordance with the bonus winning display 526 twice. A second sound effect may be started after the end. As a modified example, if a second ball enters the bonus prize opening 501 while the first bonus prize display 526 continues, the first bonus prize display 526 is interrupted and the second bonus prize display 526 is displayed. , and after the second bonus prize display 526 continues for a predetermined time, the bonus prize display 526 may be hidden. Similarly, when the second ball enters the bonus prize-winning opening 501 during the execution of the voice effect for the first bonus prize, the sound effect for the first bonus prize is interrupted, and the second bonus prize is played. You may start the audio|voice output regarding prize-winning.

As for the above-mentioned over-winning effect, when the over-winning to the big winning opening occurs a plurality of times in succession, the over-winning effect may be executed only once regardless of the occurrence of a plurality of over-winnings. In other words, regardless of the number of over winnings during one unit game, the over winning effect may be executed only once per unit game. For example, when the number of balls entered into the large winning opening during a unit game reaches a specified number (for example, 10), the large winning opening is closed, and two additional game balls are added to the big winning opening. When the ball is entered, the over winning effect (both effect display and voice output) may be executed only once after closing the big winning hole. In this case, the number of additional prize balls reflected in the total winning number display 528 is not the number of prize balls for one time, but the number of prize balls corresponding to two over winnings. As a modification, when two over winnings occur during one unit game, two over winning effects may be executed. For example, after the first over winning effect is started, the first over winning effect is executed. (both the effect display and the voice output) may be interrupted and the second over winning effect (both the effect display and the voice output) may be started.

A prize ball signal may be output from the external information output terminal 160 with a bonus prize or an over prize as a trigger. The prize ball signal output from the external information output terminal 160 may be output every time the cumulative number of prize balls acquired increases by a predetermined number (for example, 10). When the increment of the number of prize balls up to that point is 10 or more, the prize ball signal can be output with the bonus winning as a trigger. The prize ball signal may be output upon detection of winning of the big prize hole, or the prize ball signal may be output every time a prize is won in the big prize hole (for example, 13 prize balls). Incidentally, the winning ball signal may be output twice triggered by one game ball entering the big winning hole. In other words, when there is a bonus prize, the prize ball signal triggered by the bonus prize is output only once, but when there is an over prize, the prize ball signal triggered by the over prize is output once or twice. Any one of the times may be output.

If a bonus prize or a prize in the big winning slot occurs during the power failure recovery process, the processing for updating the display of the total winning number may be executed after the power failure recovery process is completed. When a power failure occurs, it takes about 0.5 to 1 second for the power failure recovery process from when the power failure is restored until the performance display on the performance display device 60 returns to a normal state. When a bonus prize winning effect or an over winning effect occurs during this power failure recovery process, the effect display on the effect display device 60 cannot be executed, so effect display and voice output relating to the bonus winning effect and the over winning effect are disabled. . On the other hand, the effect display for counting up the total number of wins display 528 triggered by winning during the power failure recovery process can be executed even after the power failure recovery. For example, if the number of displays of the total acquisition number display 528 immediately before the power failure occurs is N, the display number of the total acquisition number display 528 immediately after the completion of the power failure recovery process is set to N, and the display number N is counted up. display may be performed. In this case, it can be said that the count-up display corresponding to the winning during the power failure recovery process is executed from the beginning.

If the count-up display of the total acquisition number display 528 is being executed immediately before the power failure occurs, the count-up display may be performed from the middle after the power failure recovery process. For example, while the total acquisition number display 528 immediately before the power failure occurs is N, the actual value of the total acquisition number is N+α, and the power failure occurs while the count-up display is being performed toward the actual value N+α. If it occurs, the number of display of the total acquisition number display 528 immediately after the power failure recovery process is completed may be set to N+α, and the count-up display may be executed from the display number N+α. In this case, the display number jumps from the display number N immediately before the power failure to the display number N+α immediately after the power failure recovery process, so the count-up display corresponding to the winning during the power failure recovery process is executed from the middle. It can be said that

Note that if a bonus prize or a prize in the big winning slot occurs during the power failure recovery process, the count-up display of the total winning number display may be skipped after the power failure recovery process is completed. For example, if the display number of the total winning number display 528 immediately before the power failure occurs is N, and β winnings occur during the power failure recovery process, the total winning number display 528 immediately after the power failure recovery process is completed. may be set to N+β, and the subsequent count-up display may be omitted. In this case, it can be said that the count-up display corresponding to the winning during the power failure recovery process is not performed.

As described above, when a power failure occurs, if the count-up display of the total acquisition number display 528 immediately before the power failure occurs is not completed, the incomplete count-up display is at least partially performed after the power failure recovery process. It will be skipped and not executed. In particular, when a power outage occurs during a special game with a large number of winning balls, the count-up effect triggered by winning a prize in the big winning hole can be at least partially skipped. On the other hand, if the prize ball payout process triggered by the winning in the big winning hole is incomplete immediately before the power failure occurs, the incomplete payout process is performed after the power failure recovery process is completed. It should be noted that the unfinished payout process after the power failure recovery process is only when the RAM is not cleared at the time of the power failure. When the ram clearing process is performed at the time of power failure, the information on the number of won prize balls is reset, so that the incomplete payout process is not performed and the incomplete count-up display of the total number display 528 is not performed.

The above-described count-up display of the total number of wins display 528 is executed when a prize is won in the big prize hole or a bonus prize, so it can be executed regardless of the progress of the actual prize ball payout process. For example, when the game balls stored in the upper ball tray 105 are full and the payout process is interrupted, that is, even when a payout error occurs, regardless of whether or not the payout process is interrupted, the total winning number The count-up display of display 528 continues. Therefore, even if the payout process is incomplete, if the count-up display of the total win number display 528 triggered by winning is completed, even if the payout process is resumed after that, the payout process can be restarted. A count-up display triggered by this is not performed. For example, when the second special game is executed as a big hit immediately after the end of the first special game, the second special game is executed while the payout process of the prize balls obtained in the first special game is incomplete. When the special game is started and the payout process of the prize balls obtained in the first special game is executed during the second special game, the payout process of the prize balls obtained in the first special game is triggered. The count-up display is not executed during the second special game. During the second special game, the count-up display of the total winning number display 528 is executed with the bonus winning during the second special game or the winning of the big winning opening as a trigger.

The present invention has been described above based on the examples. It should be understood by those skilled in the art that this embodiment is merely an example, and that various modifications can be made to combinations of each component and each treatment process, and that such modifications are within the scope of the present invention. be. Modified examples are given below.

The configurations described in each of Examples 1 to 4 described above can be combined with the combinations described in the underlying technology described above. Also, the configurations described in the above-described Examples 1 to 4 can be combined. For example, as a configuration that combines all of Examples 1 to 4, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect described in Example 3 or to execute the winning effect described in Example 4 in the fall and limit configuration. good too.

Several aspects of the invention are listed below.

(Aspect 1)
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A starting port provided in the game area;
A success/failure determination means for determining whether or not a transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, can be made based on the lottery value obtained by the entry of the ball into the starting port;
a symbol display device in which symbols are variably displayed and the result of the determination is indicated by stop display of the symbols;
special game control means for shifting to the special game after the stop display when the symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device;
probability state control means for shifting from a normal probability state in which the probability of the result of the success/failure determination to be a big hit is a predetermined probability to a probability change state in which the probability of the result of the success/failure determination to be a big win is higher than the predetermined probability; ,
and a production display device capable of displaying production,
There are at least a first jackpot pattern and a second jackpot pattern as the types of patterns indicating that the result of the hit/fail determination is a jackpot, and the probability variation occurs after a special game executed after the stop display of the first jackpot pattern is finished. can be shifted to a state, and can be shifted to the normal probability state after a special game executed after the stop display of the second jackpot symbol is completed;
When the cumulative number of times that the first jackpot symbol is stop-displayed during the continuation of the probability variation from the normal probability state to the probability fluctuation state to the next normal probability state reaches a predetermined number, the After the end of the special game executed after the stop display of the first big win pattern in which the cumulative number of times during the continuation of the probability variation reaches the predetermined number, the state is shifted to the normal probability state, and the first big win pattern during the continuation of the variable probability. is stopped and displayed is less than the predetermined number, the probability is after the end of the special game executed after the stop display of the first jackpot symbol in which the cumulative number of times during the probability variation is less than the predetermined number. transitioned to a variable state,
It is possible to execute an expectation degree suggesting effect that suggests an expectation degree to be shifted to the probability variable state after the special game is completed during the probability variable continuation,
The expectation degree suggesting effect executed under a specific situation where the cumulative number of times that the first jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed during the continuation of the variable probability is the number obtained by subtracting 1 from the predetermined number is the first Expectations are likely to be lower than expectations suggestive performance executed under non-specific circumstances where the accumulated number of times the jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed is less than the number obtained by subtracting 1 from the predetermined number, or the probability variation continues. The pinball game machine is less likely to execute an expectation degree suggesting presentation under a specific situation than under the non-specific situation during the continuation of the variable probability.

(Aspect 2)
a game board on which a game area is formed;
a shooting device for shooting a game ball toward the game area according to a player's shooting operation;
A first starting port provided in the game area;
a second start port provided in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism operable to change the entry state of a game ball from a relatively difficult state to an easy state;
Based on the win-or-fail lottery value obtained when the ball enters the first start hole or the second start hole, a win-or-fail decision is made to determine whether or not the player can shift to a special game that is more advantageous than the normal game. a propriety determination means for
a symbol display device in which symbols are variably displayed and the result of the determination is indicated by stop display of the symbols;
special game control means for shifting to the special game after the stop display when the symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device;
probability state control means for shifting from a normal probability state in which the probability of the result of the success/failure determination to be a big hit is a predetermined probability to a probability change state in which the probability of the result of the success/failure determination to be a big win is higher than the predetermined probability; ,
a ball entering state control means for shifting from a normal ball entering state in which the ease of entering a ball into the second starting hole is relatively low to a state of easy ball entering in which the ease of entering a ball into the second starting hole is relatively high; ,
Fall determination for executing a fall determination that determines whether a fall from the probability variation state to the normal probability state is possible based on a fall lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first start port or the second start port. means and
a production display device capable of displaying production,
When the transition to the probability fluctuation state and the easy ball entry state is made after the end of the special game, and a fall determination is made to fall to the normal probability state before the number of symbol fluctuations after the end of the special game reaches a predetermined number. , After the fall determination, the state is shifted to the normal probability state and the easy ball entry state, and after that, if the number of symbol fluctuations after the end of the special game becomes the predetermined number, the number of symbol fluctuations after the end of the special game Triggered by the end of the predetermined number of pattern variations, the game is shifted to the normal ball entry state,
After the end of the special game, the state is shifted to the probability change state and the easy-to-enter state, and after the number of symbol changes after the end of the special game reaches the predetermined number, a fall determination is made to fall to the normal probability state. In the case, the start of the pattern variation related to the fall determination is shifted to the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state,
It is possible to display a guidance display on the performance display device to prompt the shooting of the game ball in a predetermined direction that makes it possible or easier to enter the second start hole,
When shifting to the probability fluctuation state and the easy ball entry state after the end of the special game, there is a fall determination to fall to the normal probability state before the number of symbol fluctuations after the end of the special game reaches the predetermined number. Regardless of whether or not it is played, the guide display is displayed at least until the number of symbol variations after the end of the special game reaches the predetermined number,
After the end of the special game, the state is shifted to the probability change state and the easy ball entry state, and after the number of symbol changes after the end of the special game reaches the predetermined number, a fall determination is made to fall to the normal probability state. In this case, the guidance display is displayed until before the start of the design variation related to the fall determination, and the guidance display is hidden at the start of the design variation related to the fall determination,
After the end of the special game, the state is shifted to the probability change state and the easy-to-enter state, and the number of symbol changes after the end of the special game reaches the predetermined number without a fall determination for falling to the normal probability state. Later, when the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit, the guidance display is displayed before the start of the symbol variation related to the success/failure determination, and the guidance display is hidden at the start of the symbol variation related to the success/failure determination. ,
After the end of the special game, it is shifted to the probability fluctuation state and the easy-to-enter state, and a fall determination is made to fall to the normal probability state before the number of symbol fluctuations after the end of the special game reaches the predetermined number, In addition, when the result of the winning/failure determination is not a big hit due to the symbol variation in which the number of symbol variations after the special game is completed is within the predetermined number, the number of symbol variations after the special game is completed becomes the predetermined number. The pinball game machine displays on the effect display device a notification effect for notifying that the state has fallen to the normal probability state during the variation display of the symbol variation.

(Aspect 3)
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A first starting port provided in the game area;
a second start port provided in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism operable to change the entry state of a game ball from a relatively difficult state to an easy state;
Based on the win-or-fail lottery value obtained when the ball enters the first start hole or the second start hole, a win-or-fail decision is made to determine whether or not the player can shift to a special game that is more advantageous than the normal game. a propriety determination means for
a symbol display device in which symbols are variably displayed and the result of the determination is indicated by stop display of the symbols;
A variation pattern determination means for determining a variation pattern that determines a variation time from the start of variation of the pattern to the stop display;
special game control means for shifting to the special game after the stop display when the symbol indicating that the result of the winning/failure determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device;
probability state control means for shifting from a normal probability state in which the probability of the result of the success/failure determination to be a big hit is a predetermined probability to a probability change state in which the probability of the result of the success/failure determination to be a big win is higher than the predetermined probability; ,
a ball entering state control means for shifting from a normal ball entering state in which the ease of entering a ball into the second starting hole is relatively low to a state of easy ball entering in which the ease of entering a ball into the second starting hole is relatively high; ,
Fall determination for executing a fall determination that determines whether a fall from the probability variation state to the normal probability state is possible based on a fall lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first start port or the second start port. means and
a production display device capable of displaying production,
When the transition to the probability fluctuation state and the easy ball entry state is made after the end of the special game, and a fall determination is made to fall to the normal probability state before the number of symbol fluctuations after the end of the special game reaches a predetermined number. , After the fall determination, the state is shifted to the normal probability state and the easy ball entry state, and after that, if the number of symbol fluctuations after the end of the special game becomes the predetermined number, the number of symbol fluctuations after the end of the special game Triggered by the end of the predetermined number of pattern variations, the game is shifted to the normal ball entry state,
After the end of the special game, the state is shifted to the probability change state and the easy-to-enter state, and after the number of symbol changes after the end of the special game reaches the predetermined number, a fall determination is made to fall to the normal probability state. In the case, the start of the pattern variation related to the fall determination is shifted to the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state,
When shifting to the probability fluctuation state and the easy ball entry state after the end of the special game, the pattern fluctuation number after the end of the special game is within the predetermined number. The selection tendency of the variation pattern is not changed by the pattern variation that is changed once and the number of symbol variations after the end of the special game exceeds the predetermined number while the probability variation state and the easy-to-enter state are maintained, or the probability is not changed. The number of symbol variations after the end of the special game in the variable state and the easy-to-enter state exceeds the predetermined number The number of changes in the selection tendency of the variation pattern in the symbol variation exceeds the predetermined number A pinball game machine whose number of times of changing the selection tendency of the variation pattern in the symbol variation within a predetermined number is less than the number of changes.

(Aspect 4)
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A first starting port provided in the game area;
a second start port provided in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism operable to change the entry state of a game ball from a relatively difficult state to an easy state;
Judgment of success or failure to determine whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game based on the success or failure lottery value acquired with the entry of the ball into the first start port or the second start port. Appropriateness determination means to be executed;
a special symbol display device in which a special symbol is variably displayed and the result of the success/failure determination is indicated by the stop display of the special symbol;
special game control means for shifting to the special game after the stop display when the special symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device;
probability state control means for shifting from a normal probability state in which the probability of the result of the success/failure determination to be a big hit is a predetermined probability to a probability change state in which the probability of the result of the success/failure determination to be a big win is higher than the predetermined probability; ,
a ball entering state control means for shifting from a normal ball entering state in which the ease of entering a ball into the second starting hole is relatively low to a state of easy ball entering in which the ease of entering a ball into the second starting hole is relatively high; ,
an operation port provided in the game area;
A normal symbol display device in which normal symbols are variably displayed and the normal symbols are stop-displayed with the entry of a ball into the operating port as a trigger;
an operation control means for activating the ball entry variation mechanism after the stop display when the normal symbol indicating the winning is stopped on the normal symbol display device;
Fall determination for executing a fall determination that determines whether a fall from the probability variation state to the normal probability state is possible based on a fall lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first start port or the second start port. means and
a production display device capable of displaying production,
After the end of the special game, the state is shifted to the probability change state and the easy-entering state, and fall determination is made to fall to the normal probability state before the number of times of pattern change of the special pattern after the end of the special game reaches a predetermined number. is made, the transition to the normal probability state and the easy entry state after the fall determination, if the number of symbol fluctuations of the special symbol after the end of the special game is the predetermined number, the special game After the completion of the special symbol symbol variation frequency becomes the predetermined number, the transition to the normal entering state is triggered by the end of the special symbol symbol variation,
After the end of the special game, the state is shifted to the probability change state and the easy ball entry state, and after the number of times of pattern change of the special pattern after the end of the special game reaches the predetermined number, the fall is caused to fall to the normal probability state. When the determination is made, the normal probability state and the normal ball entering state are shifted to the start of the symbol variation of the special symbol related to the fall determination,
After the end of the special game, it is shifted to the probability fluctuation state and the easy-entering state, and the result of the hit/fail determination is a big hit before the number of times of pattern fluctuation of the special pattern after the end of the special game reaches the predetermined number. or when a fall judgment is made to fall to the normal probability state, and before the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols related to the big hit or the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols related to the fall judgment, the normal symbols start to fluctuate. , When a normal symbol indicating a hit is stopped during the variable display of the special symbols related to the big hit or during the variable display of the special symbols related to the fall judgment, the said entering ball variation after the stop display of the normal symbols the mechanism operates for a first actuation time;
After the end of the special game, the state is shifted to the probability changing state and the easy-entering state, and the number of symbol changes of the special symbols after the end of the special game is the predetermined number while the probability-changing state and the easy-entering state are maintained. If the result of the hit/fail judgment becomes a big hit after becoming, or if the fall judgment to fall to the normal probability state is made, before the start of the fluctuation of the special design related to the big hit or the special design related to the fall determination When the normal symbol starts to change before the start of the change, and the normal symbol indicating that it is a hit is stopped during the variable display of the special symbol related to the big hit or during the variable display of the special symbol related to the fall judgment. , a pinball game machine in which the ball entry variation mechanism operates for a second operating time shorter than the first operating time after the normal symbols are stopped and displayed.

(Aspect 5)
a game board on which a game area is formed;
a shooting device for shooting a game ball toward the game area according to a player's shooting operation;
A first starting port provided in the game area;
a second start port provided in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism operable to change the entry state of a game ball from a relatively difficult state to an easy state;
Based on the lottery value obtained when the ball enters the first start hole or the second start hole, a decision is made as to whether or not the player can shift to a special game that is more advantageous than the normal game. a propriety determination means for
a symbol display device in which symbols are variably displayed and the result of the determination is indicated by stop display of the symbols;
special game control means for shifting to the special game after the stop display when the symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device;
probability state control means for shifting from a normal probability state in which the probability of the result of the success/failure determination to be a big hit is a predetermined probability to a probability change state in which the probability of the result of the success/failure determination to be a big win is higher than the predetermined probability; ,
a ball entering state control means for shifting from a normal ball entering state in which the ease of entering a ball into the second starting hole is relatively low to a state of easy ball entering in which the ease of entering a ball into the second starting hole is relatively high; ,
a production display device capable of displaying production,
There are at least a first jackpot pattern and a second jackpot pattern as types of patterns indicating that the result of the hit/fail judgment is a jackpot, and the stop display of the first jackpot pattern in the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state. After the end of the special game to be executed later, it is possible to shift to the easy ball entry state, and after the end of the special game to be executed after the stop display of the second big win symbol in the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state. without transitioning to the easy-entering state,
When the result of the winning/failure determination is a big hit in the normal probability state and the normal ball-entering state, the big win is determined according to the contents of the performance displayed on the performance display device during the symbol variation related to the big win. Possibilities of which of the first jackpot pattern and the second jackpot pattern are stopped and displayed when the pattern fluctuation is stopped are different,
When the cumulative number of stop-displayed symbols indicating a big win reaches a predetermined number during the continuation of the probability variation from the transition from the normal probability state to the probability variation state to the next transition to the normal probability state. , while transitioning to the normal probability state after the end of the special game executed after the stop display, the cumulative number of times the symbol indicating the big win is stopped and displayed during the continuation of the variable probability is less than a predetermined number. In the case, after the end of the special game executed after the stop display, it is possible to shift to the probability fluctuation state,
This pinball game machine shifts to the probability variation state after the special game executed after the stop display when a pattern indicating a big win is stopped after execution of a predetermined special performance.

11 first starting port 12 second starting port 60 effect display device 80 game board 81 game area 210 lottery means 213 normal figure lottery means 220 success/failure determination means 230 variation pattern determination means 260 special game control means, 275 opening/closing control means, 303 effect determination means, 304 effect control means.

Claims (1)

a game board on which a game area is formed;
a shooting device for shooting a game ball toward the game area according to a player's shooting operation;
A first starting port provided in the game area;
a second start port provided in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism operable to change the entry state of a game ball from a relatively difficult state to an easy state;
Based on the lottery value obtained when the ball enters the first start hole or the second start hole, a decision is made as to whether or not the player can shift to a special game that is more advantageous than the normal game. a propriety determination means for
a symbol display device in which symbols are variably displayed and the result of the determination is indicated by stop display of the symbols;
special game control means for shifting to the special game after the stop display when the symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device;
probability state control means for shifting from a normal probability state in which the probability of the result of the success/failure determination to be a big hit is a predetermined probability to a probability change state in which the probability of the result of the success/failure determination to be a big win is higher than the predetermined probability; ,
a ball entering state control means for shifting from a normal ball entering state in which the ease of entering a ball into the second starting hole is relatively low to a state of easy ball entering in which the ease of entering a ball into the second starting hole is relatively high; ,
and a production display device capable of displaying production,
There are at least a first jackpot pattern and a second jackpot pattern as types of patterns indicating that the result of the hit/fail judgment is a jackpot, and the stop display of the first jackpot pattern in the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state. After the end of the special game to be executed later, it is possible to shift to the easy ball entry state, and after the end of the special game to be executed after the stop display of the second big win symbol in the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state. without transitioning to the easy-entering state,
When the result of the winning/failure determination is a big hit in the normal probability state and the normal ball-entering state, the big win is determined according to the contents of the performance displayed on the performance display device during the symbol variation related to the big win. Possibilities of which of the first jackpot pattern and the second jackpot pattern are stopped and displayed when the pattern fluctuation is stopped are different,
When the cumulative number of stop-displayed symbols indicating a big win reaches a predetermined number during the continuation of the probability variation from the transition from the normal probability state to the probability variation state to the next transition to the normal probability state. , while transitioning to the normal probability state after the end of the special game executed after the stop display, the cumulative number of times the symbol indicating the big win is stopped and displayed during the continuation of the variable probability is less than a predetermined number. In this case, it is possible to shift to the probability change state after the special game executed after the stop display is completed,
This pinball game machine shifts to the probability variation state after the special game executed after the stop display when a pattern indicating a big win is stopped after execution of a predetermined special performance.

Images